Dell B2375dnf B2375dfw Mono MFP User’s Guide User Manual To The 6c8323fc 9d62 4e22 9c86 E2a297349b02

User Manual: Dell B2375dnf to the manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 359

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Dell™ B2375dfw Mono MFP
Dell™ B2375dnf Mono MFP
User’s Guide

Dell™ B2375dfw/ B2375dnf Mono MFP
User’s Guide
Click the links to the left for information on the features, options, and
operation of your printer. For information on other documentation included
with your printer, see "Finding Information".
To order replacement toner cartridges or supplies from Dell:
1

Double-click the Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP Dell Supplies Ordering
Utility or Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP Dell Supplies Ordering Utility icon
on your desktop.

OR
2

Visit Dell's website.
http://www.dell.com/supplies

Contacting Dell
NOTE: If you do not have an active Internet connection, you can find
contact information on your purchase invoice, packing slip, bill, or Dell
product catalog.

Dell provides several online and telephone-based support and service
options. Availability varies by country and product, and some services may
not be available in your area. To contact Dell for sales, technical support, or
customer service issues:
1

Visit www.dell.com/support

Verify your country or region in the Choose A Country/Region
drop-down menu at the bottom of the page.

Click Contact Us on the left side of the page.

Select the appropriate service or support link based on your need.

Choose the method of contacting Dell that is convenient for you.

-1-

Notes, Notices, and Cautions
NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better
use of your printer.
NOTICE: A NOTICE indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of
data and tells you how to avoid the problem.
CAUTION: A Caution indicates a potential for property damage, personal
injury, or death.

____________________
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
 2013 Dell Inc. All rights reserved.

Reproduction of these materials in any manner whatsoever without the
written permission of Dell Inc. is strictly forbidden.
Trademarks used in this text: Dell, the DELL logo, Inspiron, Dell Precision,
Dimension, OptiPlex,
Latitude, PowerEdge, PowerVault, PowerApp, Dell OpenManage and the
YOURS IS HERE logo are trademarks of Dell Inc.; Intel, Pentium, and Celeron
are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and other
countries; Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, MS-DOS , Windows Vista,
,Windows 7, Windows8 are either trademarks or registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Other trademarks and trade names may be used in this document to refer to
either the entities claiming the marks and names or their products. Dell Inc.
disclaims any proprietary interest in trademarks and trade names other than
its own.
Google Cloud Print is a trademark of Google Inc.
Google, Picasa, Google Docs, Android and Gmail are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.
iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S and other countries.
Wi-Fi Direct™, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™,and WPA2™ logo are trademarks of
Wi-Fi Alliance.
All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective
companies or organizations.

-2-

Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source
license information.
Rev.1.00
____________________

-3-

Finding Information
What Are You Looking For?
• Drivers for my printer
• My User’s Guide

Find It Here
Drivers and Documentation CD

You can use the Drivers and Documentation CD to
install, uninstall, or reinstall drivers and utilities or
access your User’s Guide. For details, see
"Software".
Readme files may be included on your Drivers and
Documentation CD to provide last-minute updates
about technical changes to your printer or
advanced technical reference material for
experienced users or technicians.
• How to use my printer

Quick Reference Guide
Dell™ B2375dfw / B2375dnf Mono MFP

Quick Reference Guide

Operator Panel Button Functions
1

1 2

11 10
1

Home

Go to home screen.

You can log in or log out.

3
4

13 12 11

10 9

Operator Panel

Document Input Tray

Document Glass

Control Board Cover

Document Width Guide

6
7
8

USB Memory Port

Front Cover

Output Tray

Tray 1

Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)

Paper Output Extension

Toner Cartridge

Status LED indicates the status of your machine.

Status LED

Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID in ready mode,
or inserts a pause(-) into a fax number in edit mode.
Start copy job using copy default setting regardless of which screen
the user is in if it is selected.

Copy

Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)

Document Output Tray

Redial/Pause

6
5

JC68-03031A00

HMCWMA01

About Your Printer

You can enter or exit Power Save mode.

Power Saver

Fax image to destination from stored speed dial1.

Speed Dial1

Fax image to destination from stored speed dial2.

Speed Dial2

Conﬁgures the wireless network connection easily without a computer.

Wi-Fi/WPS
(Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only)

Locating the Service Tag

Job Status

Job status shows the jobs currently running and in queue.

Info

Gives detailed information about product feature guide machine’s info.
reports, troubleshooting guide, and quick reference guide.

Understanding the Status LED
LED

Status

Description
• The machine is of-time.
• The machine is in power save mode. When data is received,
or any button is pressed, it switches to on-line automatically.

Green

Blinking

The machine is warming up or ready to receive the data.

The machine is on-line and can be used.

Orange

Blinking

Blue

Blinking

• A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be
cleared. Check the display message. When the problem is cleared, the
machine resumes operation.
• The toner cartridge is low. Order a new toner cartridge.
You can temporarily improve print quality by redistribution.
• The toner cartridge is totally empty. Remove the old toner cartridge and
install a new one.
• A paper jam has occurred.

Service Tag
XXXXXXX
000 000 000 00
Service Tag XXXXXXX

• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.
• The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display message.

Express Service Code

Wireless

• The machine is connecting to a wireless network.

• The machine is connected to a wireless network.

• The machine is disconnected from a wireless network.

CAUTION: Read and follow all safety
instructions in your Important Information
prior to setting up and operating your printer.
NOTE: Quick Reference Guide may not be
provided with your product depending on
your country.
• How to set up my
printer

Setup diagram
Setting Up Your Printer

Dell™ B2375dfw / B2375dnf Mono MFP

Conﬁguration de votre imprimante | Conﬁgurazione della stampante
Einrichten des Druckers | Conﬁguración de la impresora

2
Dell 2355dn MFP Quick Reference Guide

Front

Operator Panel

4
13

Front

6
8
9
1
10

1. DADF
2. Document width guides
3. Document input tray
4. Document output tray
5. Operator panel
6. Output tray (face down)
7. MPF (Multi purpose feeder)
8. Front cover
9. Tray 1
10. Optional tray 2
11. USB memory port
12. Paper output extension
13. Document glass
14. Toner cartridge
15. Express ervice code

1. LCD: Display.
2. Status LED: Shows the status of your machine.
3. Job Status button: Shows the jobs.
4. M/C Setup button: Leads you to the machine setup and advanced settings.
5 Start button: Initiate operation.
6. Cancel button: Cancel displayed operation.

15
1. DADF
2. Document width guides
3. Document input tray
4. Document output tray
5. Operator panel
6. Output tray (face down)
7. MPF (Multi purpose feeder)
8. Front cover
9. Tray 1
10. Optional tray 2
11. USB memory port
12. Paper output extension
13. Document glass
14. Toner cartridge
15. Express ervice code

Back
Back

Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide

Operator Panel
3

Front

Back
1
10

2
4

8
1. USB port
2. Locking slot
3. Network port
4. Optional tray 2 cable
connector
5. Telephone line socket (Line)
6. Extension telephone socket (EXT)
7. Rear door
8. Power receptacle
9. Power switch
10. Express ervice code
11. Optional memory
12. Optional wireless card

3
5

6
1. USB port
2. Locking slot
3. Network port
4. Optional tray 2 cable
connector
5. Telephone line socket (Line)
6. Extension telephone socket (EXT)
7. Rear door
8. Power receptacle
9. Power switch
10. Express ervice code
11. Optional memory
12. Optional wireless card

1. USB port
2. Locking slot
3. Network port
4. Optional tray 2 cable
connector
5. Telephone line socket (Line)
6. Extension telephone socket (EXT)
7. Rear door
8. Power receptacle
9. Power switch
10. Express ervice code
11. Optional memory
12. Optional wireless card

Touch Screen

Touch Screen
1.Copy: Enters the copy menu.
8.
: Return to the upper menu.
2. Fax: Enters the fax menu.
9.
: Scroll through available options.
3. Scan: Enters the scan menu.
10.
: Start a job.
4. Setup: Enters the advanced settings.
5. None: You can set the option which is frequently uses on
main screen. Also you can change shortcut name as well.
6.
: Shows the main screen.
7.
: Enters the LCD brightness, the USB memory,
language, and job status.

1.Copy: Enters the copy menu.
8.
: Return to the upper menu.
2. Fax: Enters the fax menu.
9.
: Scroll through available options.
3. Scan: Enters the scan menu.
10.
: Start a job.
4. Setup: Enters the advanced settings.
5. None: You can set the option which is frequently uses on
main screen. Also you can change shortcut name as well.
6.
: Shows the main screen.
7.
: Enters the LCD brightness, the USB memory,
language, and job status.

1.Copy: Enters the copy menu.
8.
: Return to the upper menu.
2. Fax: Enters the fax menu.
9.
: Scroll through available options.
3. Scan: Enters the scan menu.
10.
: Start a job.
4. Setup: Enters the advanced settings.
5. None: You can set the option which is frequently uses on
main screen. Also you can change shortcut name as well.
: Shows the main screen.
: Enters the LCD brightness, the USB memory,
language, and job status.
6.
7.

Verify the contents of the box

Remove the packing material

Vériﬁez le contenu de votre carton
Veriﬁcare il contenuto della confezione
Überprüfen Sie den Inhalt der Box
Compruebe el contenido de la caja

Retirez les matériaux d’emballage
Rimuovere il materiale di imballo
Entfernen Sie das Verpackungsmaterial
Retire el material de embalaje

(For Ethernet connection only)
Insert Ethernet cable
(Uniquement pour la connexion Ethernet) Insérez le câble Ethernet
(solo per la connessione Ethernet) Inserire il cavo Ethernet
(Nur für Ethernet-Verbindung) Schließen Sie das Ethernet-Kabel an
(Solamente para la conexión Ethernet) Inserte el cable Ethernet

-4-

Touch Screen

Turn on the printer
Mettez l’imprimante sous tension
Accendere la stampante
Schalten Sie den Drucker ein
Encienda la impresora

Set the language, country, time zone, date, and time.
Wait until "Ready" appears on the screen.
Réglez la langue, le pays, le fuseau horaire, la date et l’heure. Patientez jusqu’à ce que "Prêt" s’affiche à l’écran.
Impostare la lingua, il paese, il fuso orario, la data e l’ora. Attendere ﬁnché non viene visualizzato "Pronto" sullo
schermo.
Legen Sie Sprache, Land, Zeitzone, Datum und Uhrzeit fest. Warten Sie, bis "Bereit" im Display angezeigt wird.
Conﬁgure el idioma, el país, la zona horaria, la fecha y la hora. Espere hasta que aparezca "Lista" en la pantalla.

What Are You Looking For?
• Safety information
• Warranty information
• Regulatory Notice

Express Service Code and
Service Tag

Find It Here
Important Information

Express Service Code and Service Tag

Identify your printer when you use
www.dell.com/support or contact technical
support.
Enter the Express Service Code and Service Tag to
direct your call when contacting technical support.
The Express Service Code is not available in all
countries.
• Latest drivers for my
printer
• Answers to technical
service and support
questions
• Documentation for my
printer

Dell Support Website: www.dell.com/support
The Dell Support Website provides several online
tools, including:
• Solutions - Troubleshooting hints and tips, articles
from technicians, and online courses
• Upgrades - Upgrade information for components,
such as memory
• Customer Care - Contact information, order
status, warranty, and repair information
• Downloads - Drivers
• Reference - Printer documentation and product
specifications
You can access Dell Support at
www.dell.com/support. Select your region on the
WELCOME TO DELL SUPPORT page, and fill in the
requested details to access help tools and
information.

-5-

Contents
Dell™ B2375dfw/ B2375dnf Mono MFP User’s Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Contacting Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Finding Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

About . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Unpacking Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
About Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Operator Panel Button Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Introducing the Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Home screen mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
All Applications screen mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing the Home Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Searching application for an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Understanding the Keyboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Log In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Job Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25
28
29
30
30
31
31
32

Internal Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Printing the PCL Font list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Printing the PS3 Font list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Setting up the hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Installing the Toner Cartridge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Loading Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Making Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Connecting the Telephone Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Connecting the Printer Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Powering on the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Setting fax setup boot sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
-6-

Using USB memory device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
About USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Plugging in a USB memory key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scan to USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Scan Feature Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

47
47
48
49
50

Managing the USB Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Deleting an Image File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing from a USB memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the USB Memory Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Import (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Export (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

51
51
52
52
53

Setting up Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Storing Individual address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using speed dial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing Group address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing group dial numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Searching the address book for an entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exporting Address Book (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Importing Address Book (Administrator only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

53
53
54
54
54
55
55
56

Using Favorite Menu (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Creating Favorite Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Email Setup (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Setting up the Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Dell™ B2375dfw/ B2375dnf Mono MFP Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . 59
Printing the Printer Setting and Op-panel Menu Setting. . . . . . . . . . . 61
Printing the Printer Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Printing the Op-panel Menu setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Access Google Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Scan to Google Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Print from Google Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Scan to SharePoint Online. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
-7-

Scan to SharePoint® Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
My Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Creating a My Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Using My Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
My Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Scanning a Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Browse to Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
My Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Machine Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Setting the Machine ID (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Changing the Display Language (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Selecting Country (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Setting Day light Saving (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Power Save Mode (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Setting the Time and Date (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Setting the Clock Mode (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Setting the Sound/Volume (Administrator only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Setting the Timeout Option (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Setting the Toner Save Mode (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Setting the Timing of Toner Status Alert (Administrator only). . . . . 71
Ignoring Blank Pages (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Ignoring the Toner Low Message (Only for Fax) (Administrator only) . 71
Setting the Language (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Setting the Quick Dial (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Setting the Media Overwrite (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Changing Admin Password (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Setting the Security (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Setting the Altitude Adjustment (Administrator only). . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Checking the Firmware Version (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Setting the Application Management (Administrator only) . . . . . . . 77
Factory Reset (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Software Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Installing Software in Microsoft® Windows® Operating System . . . . 80
-8-

Installing Dell Software for Local Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Accessing management tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Firmware Update Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Using the Dell Supplies Ordering Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Using the Dell Printer Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Understanding Dell Printer Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Advanced settings user interface overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Using Dell Printer Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Dell Printer Status overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Using Wireless Setup Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Uninstalling Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Embedded Web Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Embedded Web Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
What is Embedded Web Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Required web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Logging into Embedded Web Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Embedded Web Service overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Information tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Address Book tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Settings tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Network Settings tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Security tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Maintenance tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Paper Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Print Media Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-9-

131
135
135
137
137

Storing Print Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Identifying Print Media Sources and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Selecting an Output Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Printing to the Output Tray (Face down) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Printing to the Rear Door (Face up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Using the MPF (Multi purpose feeder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Setting the Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Setting the Paper Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Setting the Paper Margin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Setting the Paper Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Setting the Tray linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Substitute Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Default Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the paper feeding flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the paper auto feeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Substitute Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configure MPF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bypass Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

149
149
149
150
150
150
150
151
151

Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Printing a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Canceling a Print Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Opening printing preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Basic Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Graphic Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dell Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Favorite Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

155
156
159
166
166
167

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of the Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Change Percentage of Your Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

- 10 -

Printing Posters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Printing Booklets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Printing on Both Sides of Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Using Watermarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Using an Existing Watermark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Watermark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing a Watermark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Watermark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

175
176
176
176

Using Overlays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
What is an Overlay?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a New Page Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a Page Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a Page Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

177
177
179
181

Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Loading Paper for Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Selecting the Paper Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Preparing a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Loading an Original Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Making Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Using Copy and Setting Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Number of Copies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplex. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zoom. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Darkness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Original Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Collation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Watermark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Eco Copying. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

187
188
188
188
189
189
189
189
195
195
196
196

Changing the Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
- 11 -

Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Scanning Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Scan to Email. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Setting up an email account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Scanning and sending an email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Scan to PC/Network PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Scan to Network Folder/FTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Setting up an Network Folder/FTP server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Scanning and sending to Network Folder/FTP server . . . . . . . . . . 203
Scan to Fax Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Scan to WSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Installing a WSD Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Scanning using the WSD feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Email & Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Scanning from image editing program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Scanning using the WIA driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Network setup (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Useful network programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SetIP wired network setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing a network configuration report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Across a Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

211
211
211
212

Setting IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
IPv4 configuration using SetIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Installing driver over the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
IPv6 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
From the control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Activating IPv6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Setting IPv6 addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Wireless network setup (Dell B2375dfw only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
- 12 -

Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Introducing wireless set up methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Using the WPS button (Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only) . . . . . . . . . . 220
Items to prepare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Choosing your type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Using the menu button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Setup using Windows (Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only). . . . . . . . . . . 223
Dell Printer Easy Wi-Fi Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Access point via USB cable in Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ad hoc via USB cable in Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using a network cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

223
227
232
235

Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off (Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only) 236
Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Setting up Wi-Fi Direct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Setting up the mobile device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Troubleshooting for wireless network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Other problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Mobile Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Android™ OS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Apple® iOS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
AirPrint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Setting up AirPrint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Printing via AirPrint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Google Cloud Print™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Registering your Google account to the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Printing with Google Cloud Print™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Faxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Setting the Printer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Setting up the Fax System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Changing the Fax Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Available Fax Defaults Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Testing Fax line connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

- 13 -

Sending a Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Adjusting the Document Darkness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Adjusting the Document Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Sending a Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Speed Dial Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Group Dial Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
On Hook Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Confirming Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Automatic Redialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Redialing fax number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Receiving a Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
About Receiving Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving Automatically in the Fax Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving Automatically in the Ans/Fax Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving Manually Using an Extension Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving Faxes in the Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

255
255
255
255
255
256
257

Automatic Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Other Ways to Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Sending a fax in the computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Sending a Delayed Fax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Fax Forward to Email addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Additional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Toll Save Mode (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Using the Secure Receiving Mode (Administrator only) . . . . . . . . 262
Using Advanced Fax Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Installing Software for Mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Install the printer driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
ReInstallation the printer driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Installing driver over the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Printing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
- 14 -

Printing a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing on Both Sides of the Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

270
270
270
270

Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Wireless network setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Access point via USB cable in Mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Ad hoc via USB cable in Mac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

Linux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Installing the MFP Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Installing the MFP Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Reinstalling the MFP Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Installing driver over the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Install the Linux driver and add network printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Add a network printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Using the Unified Driver Configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Printers Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
MFP Ports Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Printing a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Printing from Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Printing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Configuring Printer Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Scanning a Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Editing an image with Image Manager. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Unix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Installing driver over the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Install the Unix driver and add network printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

- 15 -

Uninstalling the printer driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Setting up the printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Printing a Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Changing the machine settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
General tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Image tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Text tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Margins tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Printer-Specific Settings tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Clearing the printer NVRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Backing up Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Backing up Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Restoring Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Cleaning Your Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Cleaning the Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Cleaning the Interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Cleaning the scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Maintaining the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Storing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Redistributing Toner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Replacing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Cleaning the Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Ordering Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Clearing Jams in the DADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Clearing Jams in the Paper Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Paper Feed Jam (tray 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Paper Feed Jam (optional tray 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
MPF Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
- 16 -

Fuser Area Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paper Exit Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Duplex Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips for Avoiding Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

315
316
319
321

Clearing LCD Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Solving Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Paper Feeding Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Printing Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Printing Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Fax Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Copying Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Scanning Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Global address problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Common Windows Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Common Linux Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Common Mac Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Troubleshooting PostScript (PS) Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

Installing Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Installing Printer Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Installing an Optional Tray 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
General Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Dell technical support policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
China only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Contacting Dell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Warranty and return policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

- 17 -

About
Unpacking Your Printer
About Your Printer
Introducing the Screen
Internal Fonts
Setting up the hardware
Installing the Toner Cartridge
Loading Paper
Making Connections
Powering on the Printer
Using USB memory device
Managing the USB Memory
Setting up Address Book
Using Favorite Menu (Administrator only)
Email Setup (Administrator only)

- 18 -

Unpacking Your Printer
1

Select a location for your printer.
CAUTION: The printer requires at least two people to lift it safely.
•
•

Leave enough room to open the printer tray, covers, doors, and options. It is also
important to allow enough space around the printer for proper ventilation.
Provide the proper environment:
•
A firm, level surface.
•

Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators.

•

Away from sunlight, extreme humidity, or high fluctuations in temperature.

•

A clean, dry, and dust free location.

•

Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. See "Setting
up the hardware".

•

Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table.

NOTE: Leave the printer in the box until you are ready to install it.
2

In addition to the Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP or Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP, ensure that
you have the following items in the box. If there is a missing item, contact Dell:

Toner cartridge

Power corda

Drivers and Documentation
CDb

Dell™ B2375dfw / B2375dnf Mono MFP

Quick Reference Guide

Setting Up Your Printer

Dell™ B2375dfw / B2375dnf Mono MFP

JC68-03031A00

HMCWMA01

About Your Printer

Conﬁguration de votre imprimante | Conﬁgurazione della stampante
Einrichten des Druckers | Conﬁguración de la impresora

Operator Panel Button Functions
1

1 2

2
Dell 2355dn MFP Quick Reference Guide

Front

Front
7

11
1

2
4

11 10
1
2
3
4

13 12 11

10 9

5
7

Operator Panel

Document Width Guide

Document Output Tray
Control Board Cover

6
8

Document Input Tray

USB Memory Port

Front Cover

Tray 1

Multipurpose Feeder (MPF)

Paper Output Extension

Toner Cartridge

6
7
8
9

Home

Go to home screen.

You can log in or log out.

3
5

Touch Screen

Status LED indicates the status of your machine.
Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID in ready mode,
or inserts a pause(-) into a fax number in edit mode.

Verify the contents of the box

Copy

Start copy job using copy default setting regardless of which screen
the user is in if it is selected.

Power Saver

You can enter or exit Power Save mode.

Vériﬁez le contenu de votre carton
Veriﬁcare il contenuto della confezione
Überprüfen Sie den Inhalt der Box
Compruebe el contenido de la caja

Redial/Pause

Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF)

Document Glass

Output Tray

Status LED

6
5

1
3

Operator Panel

6
8
9
1
10

Locating the Service Tag

Operator Panel

4
5
11
12

Back
Back

Quick Reference Guide
Quick Reference Guide

Operator Panel
3

Front

Back

Remove the packing material
Retirez les matériaux d’emballage
Rimuovere il materiale di imballo
Entfernen Sie das Verpackungsmaterial
Retire el material de embalaje

Fax image to destination from stored speed dial1.

Speed Dial1

Fax image to destination from stored speed dial2.

Speed Dial2

Conﬁgures the wireless network connection easily without a computer.

Wi-Fi/WPS
(Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only)

Job Status

Job status shows the jobs currently running and in queue.

Info

Gives detailed information about product feature guide machine’s info.
reports, troubleshooting guide, and quick reference guide.

Understanding the Status LED
LED

Status

Description
• The machine is of-time.
• The machine is in power save mode. When data is received,
or any button is pressed, it switches to on-line automatically.

Green

Blinking

The machine is warming up or ready to receive the data.

The machine is on-line and can be used.

Orange

Blinking

• A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be
cleared. Check the display message. When the problem is cleared, the
machine resumes operation.

Blue

Blinking

• The toner cartridge is low. Order a new toner cartridge.
You can temporarily improve print quality by redistribution.

(For Ethernet connection only)
Insert Ethernet cable

• The toner cartridge is totally empty. Remove the old toner cartridge and
install a new one.
• A paper jam has occurred.
Service Tag
XXXXXXX
000 000 000 00
Service Tag XXXXXXX

Express Service Code

(Uniquement pour la connexion Ethernet) Insérez le câble Ethernet
(solo per la connessione Ethernet) Inserire il cavo Ethernet
(Nur für Ethernet-Verbindung) Schließen Sie das Ethernet-Kabel an
(Solamente para la conexión Ethernet) Inserte el cable Ethernet

• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.
• The machine has stopped due to a major error. Check the display message.
Wireless

• The machine is connecting to a wireless network.

• The machine is connected to a wireless network.

• The machine is disconnected from a wireless network.

Quick Reference Guidec

Important Information

Telephone line corda

Turn on the printer
Mettez l’imprimante sous tension
Accendere la stampante
Schalten Sie den Drucker ein
Encienda la impresora

Setup diagram

PaperPort14 CD

a The appearance of the power cord and the telephone line cord may differ according
to your country’s specifications.

- 19 -

b The Drivers and Documentation CD contains Dell printer drivers, Scan drivers, Printer
Settings Utility, Set IP, Mac driver, Linux driver, Dell Toner Management System and a
User’s Guide.
c Quick Reference Guide may not be provided with your product depending on your
country.

NOTE: Use the telephone line cord supplied with your printer. If you choose to
use a different cord, use an AWG #26 or lower gauge cord that is not more
than 250 cm (98 inches) in length.
NOTE: The power cord must be plugged into a grounded power socket.
3

Save the carton and packing material in case the printer needs to be repacked.

Remove the packing tape from the front, back, and sides of the printer.

- 20 -

About Your Printer
These are the main components of your printer. The following illustrations show the
standard Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP or Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP and an optional tray 2
attached:

Front View
DADF (Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder)

document width document input tray
guides

operator panel
(See "Operator
Panel Button
Functions".)
output tay
(face down)

document glass

paper output
extension

document output tray
USB memory port

MPF
(multi purpose
feeder)
control board
cover
tray 1
(250-sheet paper feeder)

front cover

toner cartridge

- 21 -

Rear View

extension telephone
socket (EXT)a

telephone line
socket (Line)
EDI port

LINE

EXT

EDI

Network port
USB port
5V output port for IEEE
1284 parallel
connectorab
power switch
power receptacle

OUTPUT
5V

rear door
a

If you want to connect the extension phone or
answering machine, see "Making Connections".

- 22 -

Operator Panel Button Functions
5 6

1
2

3
10

11
Press:

To:
Go to home screen.

Home (

Job Status (

Info (

Status LED

Redial/Pause (

Copy (

Power Saver(

)

You can enter or exit Power Save mode

Speed Dial1(

)

Fax image to destination from stored speed dial1.

Speed Dial2 (

)

Fax image to destination from stored speed dial2.

Wi-Fi/WPS (

)
)

You can Log in or log out.
Job status shows the jobs currently running and in queue.

)

Gives detailed information about product feature guide
machine’s info., reports, troubleshooting guide, and quick
reference guide.

)

Status LED is Indicates the status of your machine.
)

Redials the recently sent fax number or received caller ID
in ready mode, or inserts a pause(-) into a fax number in
edit mode.
Start copy job using copy default setting regardless of
which screen the user is in if it is selected

)

(Dell B2375dfw
Mono MFP only)

Configures the wireless network connection easily
without a computer.

- 23 -

Understanding the Status LED
When the problem occurs, the Status LED indicates the machine's condition by the light
color of it's action.
LED

Status

Description

Off

Green
Status
Orange

Wireless

Blue

• The machine is off-line.
• The machine is in power save mode. When data is
received, or any button is pressed, it switches to
on-line automatically.
Blinking

The machine is warming up or ready to receive the
data.

The machine is on-line and can be used.

Blinking

• A minor error has occurred and the machine is
waiting for the error to be cleared. Check the display
message. When the problem is cleared, the machine
resumes.
• The toner cartridge is low. Order a new toner
cartridge. You can temporarily improve print quality
by redistributing the toner.
• The toner cartridge is totally empty. Remove the old
toner cartridge and install a new one.
• A paper jam has occurred.
• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in the tray.
• The machine has stopped due to a major error.
Check the display message.

Blinking

• The machine is connecting to a wireless network.

• The machine is connected to a wireless network

Off

• The machine is disconnected from a wireless
network.
• The machine is in power save mode.
• The machine's operation mode is ad-hoc mode.

- 24 -

Introducing the Screen
Home screen mode
The home screen on the control panel allows user-friendly operation of the machine. Once
you press the home button(
) on the panel, it shows the home screen.

•

Scan to Email: You can send a scanned image through your email account. see "Scan
to Email"

•

Copy : You can use Copy function. see "Copying"

•

Fax: You can use Fax function. see "Faxing"

•

Scan to Network Folder: You can save the scanned image onto a network folder. see
"Scan to Network Folder/FTP Server"

•

Scan to SharePoint Online: You can scan a document to your Microsoft SharePoint
Online account. see "Scan to SharePoint Online"

•

Access Google Drive: You can scan to or print from your Google Drive account. see
"Access Google Drive"

•

My Files: You can access, scan to or print from this internal storage. see "My Files"

- 25 -

•

My Forms: You can scan forms or print pre-set form templates from internal or
external storage. see "My Forms"

•

My Calender: You can print the calendar from your Google Calendar account. see "My
Calendar"

•

My Settings: You can browse current machine settings or change machine values.

•

Scan to USB: You can save the scanned image onto a USB memory device. see "Scan
to USB"

•

Scan to WSD: You can save the scanned image through WSD. see "Scan to WSD"

•

Scan to PC: You can save the scanned image onto a PC. see "Scan to PC/Network PC"

•

Scan to Network PC: You can save the scanned image onto a network PC. see "Scan
to PC/Network PC"

•

Scan to FTP: You can save the scanned image onto a FTP. see "Setting up an Network
Folder/FTP server"

•

ID Copy: You can use ID Copy. see "ID Copying"

•

Multiple-Up Copy: You can use Multiple-Up Copy. see "2-Up or 4-Up copying
(N-up)"

•

Book Copy: You can use Book Copy. see "Book Copying"

•

Eco Copy: You can use Eco Copy. see "Eco Copying"

•

Email & Fax: You can fax and email the scanned image in one operation. see "Email &
Fax"

•

Speed Dial Fax: You can send fax using speed dial. see "Speed Dial Fax"

•

Group Dial Fax: You can send fax using group dial. see "Group Dial Fax"

•

On Hook Fax: You can send fax using On Hook Fax. see "On Hook Fax"

•
•

: Press the left/right arrows to move Previous/next page.

All Applicatons (

) : Shows all applications.

- 26 -

•

Notification Bar : Press the black bar on top of the display screen. The following
screen appear:

If you want to close the Notification Bar, re-press the black bar.
–

Toner: Shows the amount of remaining toner capacity.

–

Screen Brightness: Adjusts brightness of the display screen.

–

Notifications: Shows machine status informations.

- 27 -

All Applications screen mode
Press the All Applicatons (

) from the home screen, it shows the applications screen.

•

USB : You can connect to USB.

•

Scan to Fax Server: You can save the scanned image via a Fax Server.

•

Scan to Network Folder: You can save the scanned image onto a network folder.

•

Print from My Files: You can print from My Files.

•

Troubleshooting: Helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.

•

Search (

•

Category (

) : You can search applications.
) : Shows the frequently used applications list.

- 28 -

Editing the Home Screen
You can edit the applictions on the home screen using Edit Mode and favorite function.

Edit Mode
Touch and hold the home display area (excluding the icon) until Edit Mode appears.
NOTE: You need to Log in to use this function.
•

Add Apps : You can add applications. Press the left/right arrows to select the screen
and click a application to add you want.

•

Remove Apps : You want to remove the applicaions, select the applications.

•

Move Apps : You can move applicaions to other screen. Press the left/right arrows to
move the application.

Using Favorite
You can set the application which is frequently used on the home screen.
NOTE: You need to Log in to use this function.
Press Favorite (

) button when each applications setting.

For example:
If you want to ID Copy setting to favorite as below :
1

Press ID Copy from the home screen.
OR
Press All Applicatons (

)

ID Copy from the home screen.

Check the Favorite (

Select the setting you want to add to the home screen.
•
•
•

) button.

Change Title Color: Select the title color.
Change Tile Color: Select the tile color.
Set Tilte: Set the title text.

- 29 -

Press Check(

) from the screen.

You can find ID Copy short cut menu on the home Screen.

Searching application for an entry
You can search using Search (
1

Press All Applicatons (

) from the home screen.

•
–

) from the screen : Enter the application name in the field with
Press Search (
the pop up keyboard.
Press Category (
) from the screen
Favorite App : Shows favorite applications.

–

Copy : Shows copy related applications.

–

Fax : Shows fax related applications.

–

Scan : Shows scan related applications.

–

USB : Shows USB related applications.

•

) , Category (

Press the home icon (

) to return to the home Screen.

Understanding the Keyboard
You can enter alphabet characters, numbers, diacritical marks, or special symbols using the
keyboard. This keyboard is specially arranged like a normal keyboard for better usability to
the user.
Touch the input area where you need to enter alphabet characters, numbers, diacritical
marks, or special symbols and the keyboard pops up on the screen.

•
•
•
•
•
•

: Hide pop up keyboard.
: Deletes characters in the input area.
: Moves the cursor between characters in the input area.
: Toggles between lowercase keys and uppercase keys or vice versa.
: Switches from the alphanumeric keyboard to the numbers or special symbols keyboard.
: Space bar.

- 30 -

User Profile
Administrator can register 20 users. General user can register himself.

Create ID
1

Press My Settings
home screen.

Input ID, Password, Confirm Password you want.

Press Check (

Machine Setup

User Profile

Add (

) button from the

) from the screen.

Delete ID
You can delete your ID only. If you want to delete other user, you need to Log in
as an administrator.
1

Press My Settings
home screen.

Press Yes from the screen.

Machine Setup

User Profile

Delete (

) button from the

Change Password
You can change your password only. If you want to delete other user, you need to Log in
as an administrator.
1

Press My Settings
Machine Setup
) from the home screen.
password (

Input Password, Confirm Password you want.

Press Check (

User Profile

Check your ID

Change

) from the screen.

Log In
Depending on the authentication settings you selected, you may need to Log in as an
administrat or User with authority to access some options under Machine Setup menu.
1

Press My Settings from the display screen.

Select the option you want. If the option is available for the administrator or User with
authority, log in page screen appears.

Input ID, Password and Domain using the pop-up keyboard which appears when you
press each field.
You can also use the Recent Users button to find the recently used ID and
Domain List button to find the domain from the list stored in the machine
•
When you Log in, you can see the ID of the logged in user on the display.
Press Check (
) from the screen.

•

- 31 -

Setting the Job Management
1

Press My Settings

Set each option as you want.

Machine Setup

Job Management from the home screen..

•
Stored Print Job: Print jobs currently stored in the RAM disk.
Secure Receive Print: Print secure received jobs currently stored in the RAM disk.
•
Press the home icon (
) to return to Home Screen.

Internal Fonts
The Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP or Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP Laser printer supports the PCL
and PS fonts. If you want to see the PCL and PS font list, follow these steps:

Printing the PCL Font list
1

Press My Settings
screen.

Press the Start ( ) button.

PCL Font list pages print out.

Machine Setup

Reports

PCL Font List from the home

Printing the PS3 Font list
1

Press My Settings
screen.

Press the Start ( ) button.

PS Font list pages print out.

Machine Setup

Report

PS Font List from the home

NOTE: You can add additional PCL fonts and PS fonts in Printer Settings
Utility. See "Using the Dell Supplies Ordering Utility".

- 32 -

Setting up the hardware
This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained in the Placemat.
Make sure you read the Placemat and complete the following steps:
1

Select a stable location.
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow extra space to
open covers and trays.

100 mm
(3.9 inches)

The area should be well-ventilated and away from direct sunlight or sources of heat,
cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the edge of your desk or table.

200 mm
(7.8 inches)

485 mm (19 inches)

200 mm
(7.8 inches)

Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline greater than 2
mm (0.08 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be affected.

Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.

Remove the tape holding the machine tightly.

Install the print cartridge.

- 33 -

Load paper. See "Loading Paper".

Make sure that all the cables are connected to the printer.

Turn the printer on.
NOTE: When you move the printer, do not tilt or turn it upside down.
Otherwise, the inside of the printer may be contaminated by toner, which can
cause damage to the printer or result in bad printing quality.

Installing the Toner Cartridge
1

Open the front cover.

CAUTION: To prevent damage, do not expose the toner cartridge to light for
more than a few minutes.
CAUTION: Do not touch the green underside of the toner cartridge. Use the
handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.

- 34 -

Remove and discard the packing foam.

Pull the toner cartridge straight out.

Remove the label and the protective film from the toner cartridge.

- 35 -

Thoroughly shake the cartridge from side-to-side to distribute the toner evenly inside
the cartridge.

NOTE: If toner comes into contact with your clothing, wipe the toner off with
a dry cloth and wash your clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into
fabric.
6

Holding the toner cartridge by the handle, slide it into the printer until it locks firmly
into place.

Close the front cover.

- 36 -

Loading Paper
Load up to 250 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2, 20lb bond) in the paper tray.
NOTE: Set the paper type and size after loading paper into the paper tray. See
"Setting the Paper Type" and "Setting the Paper Size" for the paper used in copying
and faxing, or "Paper Tab" for computer printing.
Load the paper:
1

Pull the paper tray out of the printer.

If you load paper that is longer than a standard (Letter or A4) size, such as Legal paper,
press and unlatch the guide lock, and then slide the paper length guide out completely
to extend the paper tray to its full length.

- 37 -

Slide in the paper length guide until it rests against the end of the paper stack.

For paper smaller than Letter size, adjust the rear paper length guide so that it lightly
touches the paper stack.

Pinch the paper width guide, and move it towards the stack of paper until it touches
the side of the stack.

- 38 -

Flex the sheets back and forth to loosen them, and then fan them out. Do not fold or
crease the print media. Align the edges on a level surface.

Insert the paper stack into the paper tray with the side to be printed on facing down.

Do not exceed the maximum stack height indicated by the paper limit marks on both
the inside walls of the tray.

NOTE: Overloading the paper tray may cause paper jams.

NOTE: Improper adjustment of paper guides can result in paper jams.

- 39 -

Slide the paper tray back into the printer.

Set the paper type and size. For more information, see "Setting the Paper Type" and
"Setting the Paper Size".

- 40 -

Making Connections
Connecting the Telephone Line

RJ11 telephone line
socket (Line)

To the wall jack

Plug one end of a telephone line cord into the RJ11 telephone line socket (FAX) and
the other end into an active wall jack.
To connect a telephone and/or answering machine to your printer, remove the plug
from the extension telephone socket (EXT.) ( ) and plug the telephone or answering
machine into the extension telephone socket (EXT.).

Alternative setup of Fax connected to a wall socket and a external phone or Telephone
answering device (TAD):

- 41 -

If connecting a FAX using an answering machine or telephone answering device (TAD):

Computer

LINE

EXT

Telephone Answering Device

NOTE: Set rings to answer to digit greater than the "Using an Answering
machine" setting for the telephone answering device (TAD).
If connecting a FAX using a computer modem:

LINE

EXT

Telephone Answering Device

NOTE: Set rings to answer to digit greater than the "Using an Answering
machine" setting for the telephone answering device (TAD).
NOTE: For additional information, see "Using an Answering machine" or "Using
a Computer Modem".

- 42 -

NOTE: Phone adaptor not supplied for the United Kingdom. You are advised to
buy from local suppliers.
If the phone communication is serial in your country (such as Germany, Sweden,
Denmark, Austria, Belgium, Italy, France, and Switzerland), connect the telephone or
answering machine as shown in the following figure.

- 43 -

Connecting the Printer Cable
Connecting the Printer Locally
Local printer refers to a printer connected to your computer using a USB cable. If your
printer is attached to a network instead of your computer, skip this step and go on to
"Connecting the Printer to the Network".
NOTE: USB cables are sold separately. Contact Dell to purchase a USB cable.
NOTE: Connecting the printer to the USB port of the computer requires a certified
USB cable. You will need to buy a USB 2.0-compliant cable that is about 3 m in
length.
1

Ensure that the printer, computer, and any other attached devices are powered off and
unplugged.

Connect a USB cable to the USB port on your printer.

Connect the other end of the cable to an available USB port on the computer, not the
USB keyboard.

- 44 -

Connecting the Printer to the Network
1

Ensure that the printer, computer, and any other attached devices are powered off and
unplugged.

Connect one end of a standard category 5 Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) network
cable to a LAN drop or hub, and the other end to the Ethernet network port on the
back of the printer. The printer automatically adjusts for the network speed.

NOTE: After connecting the printer, you need to configure the network parameters
on the operator panel. See "Configuring Network Parameters on the Operator
Panel".

- 45 -

Powering on the Printer
CAUTION: The fusing area at the rear part of the inside of your printer becomes hot
once the printer is powered on.
CAUTION: Be careful not to be burned when you access this area.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the printer when it is powered on. If you do, it may
give you an electric shock.
To power on the printer:
1

Plug one end of the power cord into the power receptacle at the back of the printer
and the other end into a properly grounded outlet.

Press the power switch to turn on the printer. The home screen appears on the display
indicating that the printer is now on.

NOTE: If you power on the printer for the first time, you have to set the language,
date, time, country and fax setup sequence. These settings may be needed also
after the firmware upgrade or after the printer is reset.

- 46 -

Setting fax setup boot sequence
1

Set the language. See "Changing the Display Language (Administrator only)".

Select the country. See "Selecting Country (Administrator only)".

Set the date and time. See "Setting the Time and Date (Administrator only)".

When fax setup confirmation window appears, select
If you selected

If you selected Check(

, your printer restores the fax settings as default.
):

Enter the machine ID. See "Setting the Printer ID".

Select the receive mode and ring to answer. See "Setting up the Fax System".

Test the fax line. See "Testing Fax line connection".

Your printer returns to Home Screen.

Using USB memory device
This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine.

About USB Memory
USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give you more
room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded music and videos, high resolution
photographs or whatever other files you want to store or move.
You can do the following features using an optional USB memory:
•

Scan documents and save them on the USB Memory.

•

Print data stored on a USB memory device.

•

Restore backup files to the machine’s memory

•
•

Format the USB Memory.
Check the available memory space.

Plugging in a USB memory key
The USB memory port on the front of your printer is designed for USB V1.1 and USB V2.0
memory.Your machine supports USB memory devices with FAT16/FAT32 and a sector size
of 512 bytes.
Check your USB memory device’s file system from your dealer.
Use only the metal/shielded
USB memory key.

- 47 -

Insert a USB memory key into the USB memory port on the front of your printer.

CAUTION: Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in operation or
writing to or reading from USB memory. The machine warranty does not cover damage
caused by user’s misuse.
CAUTION: If your USB memory device has certain features such as security settings
and password settings, your machine may not automatically detect it. For details
about these features, see the user’s guide of the USB memory device.

Direct USB
1

Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine.
NOTE: Insert the USB memory key as soon as the pop-up window appears.

Item

Description

Print from USB

You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device.

Scan to USB

You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a
USB memory device.

File Manager

You can delete image files stored in the USB memory.

Folder Size

You can check the amount of memory space available for saving
documents.

Import

You can restore the backup file to the machine.

Export

You can backup Setup Data and Address Book files to the USB
memory.

- 48 -

Scan to USB
1

Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine.

Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".

Press All Applicatons (

)

Scan to USB from the home screen.

If necessary, customize the scan settings including scan resolution, scan color, scan
)
format, pdf encryption, duplex, original size and original type by using Setting(
from the screen.

Press Start ( ) from the screen.
Your printer begins scanning the document and saves it to your USB memory.

After scanning is completed, you can remove the USB memory device from the
machine.

- 49 -

Changing the Scan Feature Settings
The following table shows the options you can select.
Original Type

Original Size

Resolution

Color

Format

Duplex

Text,
Text & Photo,
Photo

DADF : Letter,
A4, A5, JIS
B5,Legal,
Folio, Oficio,
Executive

100, 200,
300, 600

Color,
Gray,
Mono

JPEG, BMP,
TIFF, PDF,
Separate
PDF,Multi-Pag
e TIFF, XPS,
Multi-Page XPS

Off, Short
Edge, Long
Edge

Platten :
Letter, A4, A5,
JIS B5,
Executive,
Statement
1

Press My Settings
USB

Click Options to adjust the settings for each scan.

Machine Setup

Default Setting

Scan to

Original Type: Sets the original’s type.
Original Size: Sets the image size.
Resolution: Sets the image resolution.
Color: Sets the color mode. If you select Mono in this option, you cannot select
JPEG in Scan Format and vice versa.
•
Format: You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.
If you select Mono in Scan Format, do not select JPEG. Depending on the
selected scan type, this option may not appear.
•
Duplex: This feature especially applies when the original documents to be
scanned are two-sided.
•
File Policy: You can choose the policy for generating file name before you
proceed with the scan job through USB. If the USB memory already has the same
name when you entered a new file name, you can rename ,overwrite or cancel it.
Press the home icon (
) to return to Home Screen.

•
•
•
•

Scan Default

- 50 -

Managing the USB Memory
You can delete image files stored in the USB memory.

Deleting an Image File
To delete an image file that you scanned and saved on your USB memory stick.
1

Insert the USB memory key into the USB memory port on your printer.
NOTE: Insert the USB memory key as soon as the pop-up window appears.
OR
Press All Applicatons (

)

USB from the home screen.

Press File Manage.

Press the

Press OK when the confirmation window appears.

Press

mark next to the file you want to delete.

to go to the upper menu.

Printing from a USB memory device
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device.
File is supported by Direct Print option.
•

PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are compatible.

NOTE: If you print PRN files created from other machine, the printout would be
different.
•
•
•

TIFF
JPEG: JPEG Baseline
PDF: PDF 1.7 or lower version.

- 51 -

Insert the USB memory key into the USB memory port on your printer.
NOTE: Insert the USB memory key as soon as the pop-up window appears.
OR
Press All Applicatons (

Press Print From USB.

)

USB from the home screen.

Press the up/down arrows to select the folder or file you want.

Select the number of copies to be printed or enter the number.

Press Start ( )from the screen.
Printing is started.

Press OK when Yes appears to print another job, and repeat from step 2. Otherwise,
press the left/right arrow to select No and press OK.

Press

to go to the upper menu.

Viewing the USB Memory Status
You can check the amount of memory space available for scanning and saving documents.
1

Insert the USB memory key into the USB memory port on your printer.
NOTE: Insert the USB memory key as soon as the pop-up window appears.
OR
Press All Applicatons (

)

USB from the home screen.

Press Show Space.
The available memory space appears on the display.

Press

to go to the upper menu.

Import (Administrator only)
1

Insert the USB memory device on which the backup data is stored in to the USB
memory port.
NOTE: Insert the USB memory key as soon as the pop-up window appears.
OR
Press All Applicatons (

Press Import.

)

USB from the home screen.

Select Setup Data, Address Book and press OK.

Select the file you want to restore and press OK.

Press OK when Yes appears to restore the backup file to the machine.

Press

to go to the upper menu.

- 52 -

Export (Administrator only)
1

Insert the USB memory device into the USB memory port on your machine.
NOTE: Insert the USB memory key as soon as the pop-up window appears.
OR
Press All Applicatons (

Press Export.

)

USB from the home screen.

Select Setup Data, Address Book and press OK.

Select the file you want to restore and press OK.

Press OK when Yes appears to restore the backup file to the machine.

Press

to go to the upper menu.

Setting up Address Book
You can set up Address Book with the email addresses you use frequently via Embedded
Web Service and then easily and quickly enter email addresses by entering the location
numbers assigned to them in Address Book.

Storing Individual address
1

Press My Settings

Press Add (

Address Book from the home screen.

Press New Individual.

Enter the name, email address and phone number in the each field with the pop up
keyboard. And then Press the left/right arrows to select speed dial number.

Address Book

) icon.

NOTE: Check Favorite (
) icon for addresses you often use. You can easily
find them from the search results.
5

Press Check(

) from the screen.

NOTE: Press the home icon (

) to return to Home Screen

Using speed dial numbers
When you are prompted to enter a destination number while sending a fax, enter the speed
dial number at which you stored the number you want.
NOTE: For a one-digit (0-9) speed dial number, press and hold the corresponding
digit button on the number keypad for more than 2 seconds.

- 53 -

NOTE: For a two- or three-digit speed dial number, press the first digit button(s)
and then hold down the last digit button for more than 2 seconds.
NOTE: You can print the address book list by selecting Press My Settings
Address Book
Print
Start ( ) from the home screen.
or
Press My Settings
the home screen.

Machine Setup

Reports

Address Book

Start ( ) from

Storing Group address
1

Press My Settings

Address Book from the home screen.

Press Add (

Press New Group .

Enter the group name then press the Add (

Select the email address you want at list.

Press Check(

Press the home icon (

Address Book

) icon.
) icon from the screen.

) from the screen.
) to return to Home Screen.

Editing group dial numbers
1

My Settings

Select group you want.

Address Book

Address Book from the home screen.

You can edit Group Name and add or delete member.

Press Check(

Press the home icon (

) from the screen.
) to return to Home Screen.

Searching the address book for an entry
you can search using Search(
1

Press My Settings

) , Category (

Address Book

Address Book from the home screen.

•

Press Search(
) from the screen : Enter the email address, phone number or
name in the field with the pop up keyboard.
) from the screen : shows the frequently used addresses.
•
Press Category (
•
Press Server(
) from the screen : the shows addresses stored in the LDAP
server.
Press the home icon (
) to return to Home Screen.

- 54 -

Exporting Address Book (Administrator only)
You can edit the exported address book in CSV file format and send it back to the machine
by exporting to the machine from your computer.
1

Access the Embedded Web Service. See "Embedded Web Service".

Click Address Book

Set the option you want and click the Export button.

Export in task drop down list.

Then the address book file stored in your computer.
•
•
–

BOM : Exports address list with BOM(Byte Order Mark) information.
Encryption
No Encryption : Exports non-encrypted address list.

–

No Encryption without confidential : Exports non-encypted address list without
confidential.

–

Encryption : Exports encypted address list.

Importing Address Book (Administrator only)
You can import the address book saved in the machine to the computer in CSV file format
using Embedded Web Service.
•

Password-protected or security enhanced CSV file cannot be edited.

•

The CSV file needs to be saved in Notepad program in UTF-8.

•

Do not change the first row (model name, version, title field).

•

Use comma(,) as a separator.

•

When importing the address book data from a computer to the machine, the
existing address book data is deleted.

•

Make sure to enter valid data. If you enter invalid data, unexpected errors can
occur. Refer to the below rules for entering valid data.

–

Speed dial: A number is required for each address. You cannot use duplicate
numbers. Only numbers are allowed.

–

User Name: This field is not mandatory. You can enter up to 64 byte in UTF-8. <, “,
>, \ in not allowed.

–

Fax: This field is not mandatory. You can enter up to 40 byte using numbers (0-9)
and special characters (#,*,-).

–

Email: This field is not mandatory. You can enter up to 128 byte in email address
format (ex: printer@domain.com)

Access the Embedded Web Service. See "Embedded Web Service".

Click Address Book

Select Browse, and select the stored file.

Import in task area.

- 55 -

Setting the option you want and click the Import button.
•
–

Decryption
No Decryption : Imports non-decrypted address list.

–

No Decryption without confidential : Imports non-decrypted address list without
confidential.

–

Decryption : Imports decrypted address list.

Printing Address Book
You can check your email address book list by printing it on the paper.
1

Press My Settings

Press Start ( ) from the screen.

Print from the home screen.

Address Book

The machine begins printing.

Using Favorite Menu (Administrator only)
You can set the option which is frequently used on home screen.

Creating Favorite Menu
1

Press My Settings

Press the up/down arrows to select the menu item you want.

Machine Setup

Email Setup from the home screen.

If necessary, press the left/right arrows until the submenu item appears.

Enter the required information or select the desired status.

Press the home icon (

) to return to Home Screen.

- 56 -

Email Setup (Administrator only)
To use email features such as Scan to Email and Fax Forward to email addresses, you first
need to configure the SMTP server settings under network settings. See "Network setup
(Administrator only)" for network parameters.

Setting up the Email
1

Press My Settings

Press the up/down arrows to select the menu item you want.

Machine Setup

Email Setup from the home screen.

If necessary, press the left/right arrows until the submenu item appears.

Enter the required information or select the desired status.

Press the home icon (

) to return to Home Screen.

Available Options for Email Account Setup
Option

Description

SMTP Servera

You can set the printer to access an SMTP server for outgoing mail.
• SMTP Server: Enables you to enter the IP address or host name of
the SMTP server. This can be given in dotted decimal notation or as a
domain name. (e.g. 111. 121. 211. 211 or smtp.xyz.com)
• Max Mail Size: Enables you to specify the maximum size of mail
which can be sent.

Send to Self

You can set whether or not your outgoing emails are sent to your
email account.

Default [To:]
Address

You can set the default email address that appears on the
display(Max9).

Default [From:]
Address

You can set the default email address that appears on the
display(Max1).

Default Subject

You can set the default subject in your emails.

a If you want to use the host name in SMTP server, you must set the DNS server first.

- 57 -

Menu Overview
Dell™ B2375dfw/ B2375dnf Mono MFP Menu Functions
Printing the Printer Setting and Op-panel Menu Setting
Access Google Drive
Scan to SharePoint Online
My Files
My Forms
My Calendar
Machine Setup

- 58 -

Dell™ B2375dfw/ B2375dnf Mono MFP Menu
Functions
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the
machine's functions. These menus can be accessed by touching them on the display
screen.
NOTE: Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or setup.
Refer to the following table:
Copy
Copy

Scan
Scan to Email

Fax
Fax

Eco Copy

Scan to PC

Speed Dial Fax

Book Copy

Scan to Network PC

Group Dial Fax

ID Copy

Scan to Network Folder

On Hook Fax

Multiple-up Copy

Scan to FTP
Scan to USB
Scan to Fax Server
Scan to WSD
Email & Fax

Access Google Drive
Scan to SharePoint Online
My Files

- 59 -

My Forms
My Calender
My Settings
USB
Print from My files
Troubleshooting
Machine Setup

Default Setting
Paper Setup
Tray Behavior
Reports
Fax Setup
Email Setup
Network Setup
Security
User Profile
Initial Setup
Quick Dial Setup
Restore Options
Factory Reset
Job Management
Stamp
Application Management

- 60 -

Printing the Printer Setting and Op-panel
Menu Setting
NOTE: This will be helpful for the users to maneuver through the op-panel setting
and tree in changing the defaults.

Printing the Printer Setting
1

Press My Settings
screen.

Press Start ( ) on screen.

The Printer Settings page prints out.

Machine Setup

Reports

Printer Settings from the home

Printing the Op-panel Menu setting
1

Press My Settings
home screen.

Press Start ( ) on screen.

The Op-panel Menu Tree prints out.

Machine Setup

Reports

Op-panel Menu Tree from the

Access Google Drive
You should be registered to the Google account to use this function. Access Google Drive
follow Google Log in policy.
1

Press Access Google Drive from the home screen.
OR
Press All Applicatons (

)

Access Google Drive from the home screen.

Enter Email id and Password.
I f you want to log in automatically, check Remember me. Then click Yes when pop up
shows up. If you want to Log in another google account, press Logout from Screen in
Access Google Drive and re-Log in.

Press Sign in from the screen.
•
•
•
•
•

Back icon (
) : Quits Access Google Drive.
Search ( ) : Searchs files.
Favorite ( ) button : Setting Favorite. See "Using Favorite Menu (Administrator
only)"
Options : Setting options.
Preview : See the preview.

- 61 -

•

Logout : Logs out from the Access Google Drive.

CAUTION: If you do not log out, other people can use your ID.

Scan to Google Drive
1

Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass. For details about loading
a document, see "Loading an Original Document".

Press Access Google Drive

Scan to Google Dive from the home screen.

OR
Press All Applicatons (
home screen.
3

) Access Google Drive

Scan to Google Drive from the

Select the folder you want.
If necessary, customize the scan settings including Resolution, Color, Format,
Original Size, Original Type, Duplex, PDF Encryption, File Name, File Conversion and
Create Folder by pressing Setting(
) from the screen.

Press Start ( ) on the screen.

Print from Google Drive
1

Press Access Google Drive

Print from Google Drive from the home screen.

OR
Press All Applicatons (
the home screen.

) Access Google Drive

Print from Google Drive from

If necessary, customize the print settings including Number of Copies, Auto Fit,
Duplex and Tray by pressing Options.
2

Select the file you want to print.

Press Start ( ) on screen.

- 62 -

Scan to SharePoint Online
You can use Scan to SharePoint Online in the machine. You should be registered to the
Microsoft office 365 account to use this function. Scan to SharePoint Online follow
Microsoft Log in policy.
1

Press Scan to SharePoint Online from the home screen.
OR
Press All Applicatons (

)

Scan to SharePoint Online from the home screen.

Enter URL, User ID and Password.
I f you want to log in automatically, check Remember me. Then click Yes when pop up
shows up. Then you can using without Log in next time. If you want to Log in another
Microsoft office 365 account, press Logout from Screen in Scan to SharePoint
Online and re-Log in.

press Check(

You can also add the URL to Scan to SharePoint Online List. From the Embedded Web
Solution Settings
Scan to SharePoint Online
Service select Settings tab
General.
•
•
•
•
•

) from the screen.

Back icon (
) : Quit Scan to SharePoint Online.
Search : Searches files.
Options : Setting options.
Preview : See the preview.
Logout : Logs out from the Scan to SharePoint Online.

CAUTION: If you do not Log out, other people can use your ID.

Scan to SharePoint® Online
1

Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass. For details about loading
a document, see "Loading an Original Document".

Press Scan to SharePoint® Online from the home screen.
OR
Press All Applicatons (

)

Scan to SharePoint® Online from the home screen.

Press Start ( ) on screen.

- 63 -

My Files
This feature allows you to use the device shared folder as a My Files. The advantage of this
feature is that you can conveniently use the shared folder through your computer’s window.

Creating a My Files
1

Open the Windows Explore window from the computer.

Enter the printer’s \\[ip address] (example:\\169.254.133.42) in the address field, and
press the enter key or click Go.

Using My Files
You can use My Files in the exactly same way as a normal computer. Create, edit and delete
the folder or file as a normal Windows folder. You can also store scanned data in My Files.
You can directly print files stored in My Files. You can print TIFF, PDF, JPEG,PRN, PDF and
PCL files.
•

Press My Files from the home screen.
OR
Press All Applicatons (

) My Files from the home screen.

Scan to My Files : Scans and save to My Files.

Print from My Files : Prints files in My Files.

File Manager : Creates folder, delete folder and files.

Folder Size : Shows hard disk information.

NOTE: All files stored in My Files are not encrypted and can be accessed by all
users.

- 64 -

My Forms
This feature allows you to use scan to My Files, Network Folder, FTP and print from My
Files, Network location(HTTP, HTTPS, Network Folder, FTP) and also manage My Files.

Scanning a Form
1

Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass. For details about loading
a document, see "Loading an Original Document".

Press My Forms

Scan a Form from the home screen.

OR
Press All Applicatons (
3

)

My Forms

Scan a Form from the home screen.

Select folder you want.
My Files : Scans to My Files.
•
•
Network Folder : Scans to Network Folder.
•
FTP : Scans to FTP.
If necessary, customize the scan settings including Resolution, Color, Format,
Original Size, Original Type, Duplex, PDF Encryption, File Name, and Overwite by
pressing Setting(
) from the screen.

–

Search (

–

Add Bookmark (

) : Searches folder and files.

–

Preview (

) : Adds bookmark.

) : Preview a document.

Press Start ( ) from the screen.

Browse to Print
Browse from My Files
You can print documents stored on My Files.
1

Press My Forms

Browse to Print

Browse from My Files from the home screen.

OR
Press All Applicatons (
)
Files from the home screen.

My Forms

Browse to Print

Browse from My

If necessary, print settings including Number of Copies, Auto Fit, Duplex and Tray by
pressing Setting(
) from the screen.
–

Search (

) : Searches folders and files.

–

Add Bookmark (

) : Adds bookmark.

- 65 -

–
2

Preview (

) : Preview a document.

Select the file for print.

Press Start ( ) from the screen.

Print from Network Location
You can print on Network location (HTTP, HTTPs, Network Folder, FTP).
1

Press My Forms
home screen.

Select from Network Location from the

Browse to Print

OR
Press All Applicatons (
)
My Forms
Network Location from the home screen.

Browse to Print

Select from

If necessary, print settings including Number of Copies, Auto Fit, Duplex and Tray by
) from the screen.
pressing Setting(

–

Add Bookmark (

–

Save (

–

Preview (

) : Add bookmark.

) : Save Forms.
) : Preview a document (JPEG Only).

Select Type and input Path.
–

Type : Choosing protocol (support navigation function in FTP only).

–

Path : Input network location path.

Press Start ( ) on the screen.

Managing My Files
You can search, add, delete the files and folders in My Files.
1

Press My Forms

Manage My Files from the home screen.

OR
Press All Applicatons (
2

)

My Forms

You can add folder, delete file and folder.
–

Add Folder (

–

Delete (

) : Adds folder.

) : Deletes files and folders.

- 66 -

Manage My Files from the home screen.

My Calendar
You should be registered to the Google CalendarTM account to use this function. My
Calendar follow Google Log in policy.
1

Press My Calendar from the home screen.
OR
Press All Applicatons (

)

My Calendar from the home screen.

Enter Email and Password, press the Sign in from the screen.
I f you want to log in automatically, check Remember me. Then click Yes when pop up
shows up. Then you can using without Log in next time. If you want to Log in another
) from control panel in My Calendar and
google account, press Log In/Out(
re-Log in.

If necessary, customize the print settings including Number of Copies, Tray by
) from the screen.
pressing Options(
–

Favorite (
only)"

–

Log out : Logs out from My Calendar.

–

Back icon (

–

Options : Setting options.

–

Start icon ( ) : Print the calendar for the selected Range.

) button : Setting Favorites. See "Using Favorite Menu (Administrator

) : Quit My Calendar.

CAUTION: If you do not Log out, other people can use your ID. If you do not log
out, other people can use your ID.
4

Select calender you want.
Press Start ( ) on the screen.

- 67 -

Machine Setup
Setting the Machine ID (Administrator only)
You can set the machine ID and fax number which will be printed at the top of each page. If
you have installed the fax multi-line kit, you need to select a line first, follow these steps:
1

Press My Settings
Machine Setup
from the home screen.

Enter Fax and ID using the keyboard on the display. See "Understanding the
Keyboard" for more information about using the keyboard.

Press OK then home icon (

Initial Setup

Machine ID & Fax Number

) to return to Home Screen.

Changing the Display Language (Administrator only)
To change the displayed language that the operator panel displays, follow these steps:
1

Press My Settings
screen.

Press the language you want.

Press the home icon (

Machine Setup

Initial Setup

Language from the home

) to return to Home Screen.

Selecting Country (Administrator only)
To change the country that appears on the operator panel, follow these steps:
1

Press My Settings
home screen.

Press the country you want.

Press the home icon (

Machine Setup

Initial Setup

Select Country from the

) to return to Home Screen.

Setting Day light Saving (Administrator only)
If your country switches to Daylight Savings Time each year, use this procedure to
automatically switch to Daylight Savings Time and to Standard time.
1

Press My Settings
home screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select Manual.

Enter the Start Date , Start Time, End Date and End Time each using the up/down
arrows.

If you select Yes, system reboot immediately.

Machine Setup

Initial Setup

- 68 -

Day Light Saving from the

Power Save Mode (Administrator only)
If your country switches to Daylight Savings Time each year, use this procedure to
automatically switch to Daylight Savings Time and to Standard time.
1

Press My Settings
screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select the time settings you want.

Press the home icon (

Machine Setup

Initial Setup

Power Save from the home

) to return to Home Screen.

NOTE: Available setting range is from 1min. to 120 min. and you can also access this
mode from the EWS (Printer Settings
Print Settings
Setup Menu and select
Print Power Save).

Setting the Time and Date (Administrator only)
The time and date are printed on all faxes.
NOTE: It may be necessary to reset the correct time and date if loss of power to the
printer occurs.
To set the time and date:
1

Press My Settings
screen.

Enter the date and time each using the up/down arrows.

Day= 01 ~ 31
Month= 01 ~ 12
Year= 2000 ~ 2036
Hour= 01 ~ 12 (12-hour mode)
00 ~ 23 (24-hour mode)
Minute= 00 ~ 59
Press the home icon (
) to return to Home Screen.

Machine Setup

Initial Setup

Date & Time from the home

Setting the Clock Mode (Administrator only)
To set the clock mode:
1

Press My Settings
screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select the appropriate option you want.

Hour= 01 ~ 12 (12-hour mode)
00 ~ 23 (24-hour mode)
Press the home icon (
) to return to Home Screen.

Machine Setup

Initial Setup

- 69 -

Clock Mode from the home

Setting the Sound/Volume (Administrator only)
You can set the volume for key sounds, alarm sounds, and the sound that occurs during a
fax job.
1

Press My Settings
home screen.

Press the appropriate option you want.
•
•
•
–

Machine Setup

Initial Setup

Sound/Volume from the

Key Sound: You can set the key sound volume for when pressing the button, you
can select Mute, 1(low), 2(mid), and 3(high)
Alram Sound: You can set the alram sound volume, you can select Mute, 1(low),
2(mid), and 3(high).
Fax Sound
Speaker Volume (only in communication): You can select Mute, 1(low) ~7(high).
The sounds from the telephone line through the speaker, such as a dial tone or a
fax tone. With this option set to Comm. which means Comm., the speaker is on
until the remote machine answers.

–

Ring Volume: Adjusts the ringer volume. For the ringer volume, you can select
Mute, 1(low)-7(high).

–

Dial Tone Volume: Adjusts the dial tone volume. For the dial tone volume, you can
select Mute, 1(low)-7(high).

Press Check(

) then home icon (

) to return to Home Screen.

Setting the Timeout Option (Administrator only)
You can set the time the printer waits before it restores the default copy or fax settings if you
do not start copying or faxing after changing the settings on the operator panel.
1

Press My Settings
screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select on/off.

Enter the timeout value using the up/down arrows or direct input using the popup
keyboard.

Press Check(

Machine Setup

) then home icon (

Initial Setup

Timeout from the home

) to return to Home Screen.

Setting the Toner Save Mode (Administrator only)
Toner save mode allows your machine to use less toner on each page. Activating this mode
extends the life of the toner cartridge beyond what one would experience in the normal
mode, but it reduces print quality.
1

Press My Settings
screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select On.

Press the home icon (

Machine Setup

Initial Setup

) to return to Home Screen.

- 70 -

Toner Save from the home

Setting the Timing of Toner Status Alert (Administrator
only)
You can customize the level to alert toner low or toner almost empty. If the current toner
amount drops below the setting level, the printer will display a warning message on the
operator panel.
1

Press My Settings
home screen.

Press the option you want.

Press the left/right arrows to select the option in Warning Level and Alert On Panel.

Press the home icon (

Machine Setup

Initial Setup

Toner Status Alert from the

) to return to Home Screen.

Ignoring Blank Pages (Administrator only)
The printer detects the printing data from computer whether a page is empty or includes
any data. To skip the blank pages at printing document, follow these steps:
1

Press My Settings
home screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select On.

Press the home icon (

Machine Setup

Initial Setup

Print Blank Pages from the

) to return to Home Screen.

Ignoring the Toner Low Message (Only for Fax)
(Administrator only)
When the toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life, the printer shows
the toner empty message and continues printing except incoming faxes. In this case,
incoming faxes are saved in memory. However, you can set the machine to print incoming
faxes, even though print quality is not optimal.
1

Press My Settings
home screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select On.

Press the home icon (

Machine Setup

Initial Setup

Allow Toner Low from the

) to return to Home Screen.

Setting the Language (Administrator only)
Sets the language of the text that appears on the control panel display.
1

Press My Settings
screen.

Machine Setup

Initial Setup

Or
Press My Settings

Language from the home screen.

Select language you want.

Press

and home icon (

) to return to Home Screen.

- 71 -

Language from the home

Setting the Quick Dial (Administrator only)
Set the speed dial numbers.
1

Press My Settings

Machine Setup

Speed Dial Setting from the home screen.

Or
Press and hold the Speed Dial1(
panel for less than 2 seconds.

) or Speed Dial2 (

) button on the control

Select number you want.

Choose the appropriate option.

•
Add ( ) Quick Dial number1 : Stroed at Quick Dial 1.
•
Add ( ) Quick Dial number2 : Stored at Quick Dial 2.
•
Delete ( ) Quick Dial number : Delete the Quick Dial number.
Press
and home icon (
) to return to Home Screen.

Setting the Media Overwrite (Administrator only)
You can select the method for overwriting the secure non-volatile memory (hard disk).
1

Press My Settings
home screen.

Selects option you want.

DoD 5220.28M : Select to overwrite the memory 3 times. When overwriting three
times, patterns 0x35, 0xCA, 0x97 are used to overwrite the disk’s content. This
method of overwriting the disk is specified by US DoD.
Australian ACSI 33 : Select to overwrite the memory 5 times. When overwriting 5
•
times, character “C” and its complement alternatively are used to overwrite the
disk. After the 2nd time, there is a mandatory validation. For the 5th time, random
data is used.
•
German VSITR : Select to overwrite the memory 7 times. When overwriting for the
6 times, alternate 0x00 and 0xff are used to overwrite the disk, and, in the 7th
time, the disk is written with 0xAA.
•
Custom : Select to determine the number of times the memory will be
overwritten. The hard disk will be overwritten as many times as the number you
select.
Press Start ( ) on the screen.

Machine Setup

Initial Setup

Media Overwrite from the

•

If you select Yes, all jobs will be delete and system reboot immediately.

Changing Admin Password (Administrator only)
You can change admin passwod.
1

Press My Settings
Machine Setup
from the home screen.

Enter the new password and confirm password.
Press Check(

) then home icon (

Initial Setup

Change Admin Password

) to return to Home Screen.

- 72 -

Setting the Security (Administrator only)
Authentication
This feature allows you to choose the authentication method for user authentication.
1

Press My Settings
screen.

Select the Mode.

Machine Setup

Security

Authentication from the home

•

Device Mode: Activate device authentication. Device authentication requests a
user to login before being able to use the device. Users cannot use any
application without logging in.
Application Mode: Activate application authentication. An administrator can
•
choose the application(s) to require user to login to use. Users cannot use the
selected application(s) without logging-in. Press Application mode to enable
authentication.
•
Basic Mode: Activate basic authentication. Users are asked to login when they
select options that are only available to administrators.
Select the Method.
•

Local Authentification: Executes authentification process based on the user
information stored at HDD in the device.
Kerberos Authentification: Executes authentification process based on the user
•
information stored at kerberos server.
•
SMB Authentification: Executes authentification process based on the user
information stored at smb server.
•
LDAP Authentification: Executes authentification process based on the user
information stored at LDAPserver.
Standard Accounting Only: Allows users to login by entering ID and password.
•
Press
and home icon (
) to return to Home Screen.

Accounting
You can set usage limits for each user to use each feature if Standard accounting method is
chosen.
1

Press My Settings
screen.

Select the appropriate accounting option.

•
No Accounting: Select not to use this feature.
•
Standard Accounting: Select to use the installed job accounting method.
Press
and home icon (
) to return to Home Screen.

Machine Setup

Security

- 73 -

Accounting from the home

Setting the Altitude Adjustment (Administrator only)
You can choose the altitude of the place where your machine is located. The print quality is
affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined by the height of the machine above
sea level. Therefore, it is important to set the right altitude.
1

Press My Settings
the home screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select altitude your machine is in.
Press

Machine Setup

and home icon (

Initial Setup

Altitude Adjustment from

) to return to Home Screen.

5,000 m
(16,404 ft)

4,000 m
(13,123 ft)

2
3,000 m
(9,842 ft)

3
2,000 m
(6,561 ft)

4
1,000 m
(3,280 ft)

5
0

1
2
3
4
5

High 4
High 3
High 2
High 1
Normal

- 74 -

Checking the Firmware Version (Administrator only)
You can check the firmware version used in the machine.
1

Press My Settings
home screen.

You can check the firmware version used in the machine.

Machine Setup

Initial Setup

Firmware Version from the

Reports
The following reports are available:

Printer Settings Report
This list shows the status of the user-selectable options. You may print this list to confirm
your changes after changing any settings.

Op-panel Menu Tree Report
This report shows information about the menu functions list.

Address Book Report
This report shows information about the Address Book list.

Out-going Fax Report
This report shows information about the faxes you recently sent.

In-coming Fax Report
This report shows information about the faxes you recently received.

Scheduled Jobs Report
This list shows the documents currently stored for Delayed faxes or Toll Save faxes. The list
shows the starting time and the type of operation.

MSG Confirm Report
This report shows the fax number, the number of pages, the elapsed time of the job, the
communication mode, and the communication results.

Junk Fax List Report
This list shows up to 10 fax numbers specified as junk fax numbers by using the Junk Fax
Setup menu; see "Using Advanced Fax Settings". When the Junk Fax Setup feature is turned
on, incoming faxes from those numbers will be blocked.
This feature recognizes the last 6 digits of the fax number set as a remote machine’s ID.

- 75 -

Demo Page Report
Prints a demo page to ensure that the printer is operating correctly.

PCL Font List or PS Font List Report
This report shows the PCL or PS font list.

Network Settings Report
This list shows the status of the network options. You may print this list to confirm your
changes after changing any settings.

Email Sent Report
This report shows information about the emails that you have recently sent.

Printing a Report
1

Press My Settings

Select Reports.

Machine Setup from the home screen.

Select the reports you want and Press Start ( ) from the screen.
•
Printer Settings: Printer Settings list
•
Network Settings: Network Settings list
•
Address Book: Individual / Group list
•
Out-going Fax: Sent fax report
•
In-coming Fax: Received fax report
•
Scheduled Jobs: Scheduled job information
•
MSG Confirm: Message confirmation
Junk Fax List: Junk fax number lists
•
•
Email Sent: Sent Email report
•
Op-panel Menu Tree : Menu Tree list
•
Demo Page: Demo page
•
PCL Font List: PCL Font list
•
PS Font List: PS Font list
The selected information prints out.

- 76 -

Setting the Application Management (Administrator
only)
You can add/delete/enable/disable applications.But, OOB features cannot be added or
deleted.
Adding an application
You can add applications.
1

Press My Settings

Click the Install (

Find the application file by entering the URL in Manual Input(URL) or by using the USB
Stick.

Press Start ( ) from the screen.

Machine Setup

Application Management

) icon.

Deleting an application
You can delete applications.
1

Press My Settings

Select the application you want.

Click the Uninstall (

Press Yes.

Machine Setup

Application Management

) icon.

Disabling an application
You can enable or disable applications.
1

Press My Settings

Select the application.

Click the Enabled button then it will be changed Disabled.

Press the home icon (

Machine Setup

Application Management

) to return to Home Screen.

Confirming application information
You can check the detail information of applications.
1

Press My Settings

Select the application.

Click the Detail (

Machine Setup

Application Management

) icon.

Factory Reset (Administrator only)
Clears all of the data stored in the memory and resets all of your settings to the factory
default.
1

Press My Settings

Press Start ( ) on the screen.

After factory reset, machine will reboot automatically.

Machine Setup

Factory Reset

- 77 -

Software
Software Overview
Installing Software in Microsoft® Windows® Operating
System
Accessing management tools
Firmware Update Utility
Using the Dell Supplies Ordering Utility
Using the Dell Printer Manager
Using Dell Printer Status
Using Wireless Setup Utility
Uninstalling Software

- 78 -

Software Overview
After setting up your printer and connecting it to your computer, you must install the drivers
and utilities from the "Installing Software in Microsoft® Windows® Operating System" CD
included with your printer. If you purchased a DellTM computer and your printer at the same
time, the drivers and utilities are automatically installed. You don’t need to install them. The
"Installing Software in Microsoft® Windows® Operating System" CD contains the following:
•

Dell Printer PCL driver- allows your computer to communicate with your printer. To
use your printer as a printer in Windows, you must install the printer driver(s). For
information about installing the printer drivers in Windows, see "Installing Software in
Microsoft® Windows® Operating System".

•

PS driver- PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file. You can use the PostScript driver to
print documents.

•

Firmware Update Utility- use this program to update your machine’s firmware. See
"Firmware Update Utility".

•

Embedded Web Service- enables you to monitor the status of your network printer
without leaving your desk.

•

Dell Supplies Ordering Utility- allows you to order replacement toner cartridges or
supplies from Dell.

•

Printer Settings Utility- allows you to set up fax phonebook and the printer's other
options from your computer desktop.

•

SetIP- Use this program to set your printer's TCP/IP addresses.

•

Dell Printer Manager - Dell Printer Manager is an application that combines Dell
machine settings into one location.

•

Dell Printer Status- This program allows you to monitor the printer’s status and alerts
you when an error occurs during printing.

•

Scan Driver- TWAIN or Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) drivers are available for
scanning documents on your printer.

•

User’s Guide- PDF documentation provides detailed information about using your
printer.

•

LDAP- enables you to store Email addresses in the (LDAP) server. Also, supports a
method of securing LDAP communication via SSL. In the Embedded Web Service,
you can set the LDAP server attributes.

- 79 -

Installing Software in Microsoft® Windows®
Operating System
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the "Minimum Requirements".
NOTE: For Microsoft Windows® XP, Windows Server® 2003 Server® 2008, Windows
Vista®, Windows 7 and Windows Server® 2008 R2, Windows 8 the system
administrator should install Dell software.

Supported Operating Systems
•

Windows XP Home edition or Professional

•

Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2

•

Windows Vista

•

Windows 7

•

Windows 8

Minimum Requirements
•

Disk space: Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista: 1 GB
Windows 7: 16 GB
Windows 8: 16 GB
Windows Server 2008 R2: 10 GB

•

Memory: Windows XP/Server 2003: 128 MB
Windows Vista/Server 2008: 512 MB
Windows 7: 1 GB
Windows 8: 1 GB (2 GB)
Windows Server 2008 R2: 512 MB (2048 MB)

•

CPU: Windows XP/Server 2003/Server 2008/Vista: Pentium III 933 MHZ or higher
Windows 7: Pentium IV 1 GHz 32 bit or 64 bit processor or higher
Windows 8: Pentium IV 1 GHz 32-bit or 64-bit processor or higher
Windows Server 2008 R2: Pentium IV 1 GHz (x86) or 1.4 GHz (x64) processors (2
GHz or faster)

•

Required software: Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher

- 80 -

Installing Dell Software for Local Printing
A local printer is a printer attached to your computer using a USB cable. If your printer is
attached to a network instead of your computer, skip this step and go on to "Installing Dell
Software for Network Printing" or attached to a network instead of your computer,go on to
A printer driver is a software that lets your computer communicate with your printer. The
procedure to install drivers depends on the operating system you are using.
NOTE: If you attach a USB printer cable while your printer and computer are
powered on, the Found New Hardware Wizard launches immediately. Cancel the
screen and use the "Installing Software in Microsoft® Windows® Operating System"
CD to install the Dell software.
1

Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.

Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive. If the installation window
All Programs
Accessories
Run.
does not appear, click Start

X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CDROM drive and
click OK.
–

For Windows 8, If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select
Search
Apps and search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the
letter that represents your CD-ROM drive and click OK. If "Tap to choose what
happens with this disk" pop-up window appears, click the window and selectRun
Setup.exe.

Select Setup...

- 81 -

Select USB on the Select a Connection Method.

Enter the your printer name. Then click Next.

Follow the instructions in the installation window.

- 82 -

Accessing management tools
Dell provides a variety of management tools for Dell printers.
1

Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.

From the Start menu, select Programs or All Programs.

Apps.
•
For Windows 8, from the Charms, select Search
Find Dell
Dell Printers
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP or Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP

You can see installed management tools.

Click the management tool you want to use.

Firmware Update Utility
You can update your printer’s firmware using the Firmware Update Utility.
1

From the Start menu, select Programs
Dell Printers
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
or Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP
Firmware Update Utility.

Download the latest firmware. Click www.dell.com/support

If your printer is connected with an USB cable, click USB Connected Printer.

Click Browse and select the downloaded firmware file.

Click Update Firmware.

- 83 -

Using the Dell Supplies Ordering Utility
To order replacement toner cartridges or supplies from Dell:
NOTE: Availabe for Windows or Mac OS users only.
1

Double-click the Dell Supplies Ordering Utility icon on your desktop.

OR
Dell Printers
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
From the Start menu, select Programs
or Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP
Dell Supplies Ordering Utility.
NOTE: For Mac,
Open the Applications folder
2

Dell folder

Dell Supplies Ordering Utility.

The Dell Supplies Ordering Utility window opens.

Click to order replacement
toner cartridges online.
See "Ordering Supplies".

Shows the toner level
for your printer.

Select your location.
Shows phone number.
You can find for more
information on recycling.

- 84 -

Using the Dell Printer Manager
•

Available for Windows and Mac OS users only.

•

For Windows, Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher requirement for Dell Printer
Manager.

Dell Printer Manager is an application that combines Dell machine settings into one
location. Dell Printer Manager combines device settings as well as printing environments,
settings/actions and launching. All of these features provide a gateway to conveniently use
your Dell machine. Dell Printer Manager provides two different user interfaces for the user
to choose from: the basic user interface and the advanced user interface. Switching
between the two interfaces is easy:
just click a button.

Understanding Dell Printer Manager
To open the program:
For Windows,
Select Start
Programs or All Programs
Dell Printers
Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
Dell Printer Manager.

Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP or

•

For Windows 8, from Charms, select Search
Apps
Dell Printers
Dell
Dell Printer Manager.
B2375dnf Mono MFP or Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP

•

For Mac, Open the Applications folder

Dell folder

Dell Printer Manager.

The Dell Printer Manager interface is comprised of various basic sections as described in the
table that follows:
NOTE: The screenshot may differ depending on the operating system you are
using.

- 85 -

Printer list

The Printer List displays printers installed on your computer and
network printers added by network discovery (Windows only).

Printer

This area gives you general information about your machine. You
can check information, such as the machine’s model name, IP
address (or Port name), and machine status.

information

NOTE: You can view the online User’s Guide.
3

Application
information

Includes links for changing to the advanced settings, preference,
help, and about.
button is used to change the user interface
NOTE: The
to the advanced settings user interface. See "Embedded
Web Service".

Quick links

Displays Quick links to machine specific functions. This section
also includes links to applications in the advanced settings.
NOTE: If you connect your machine to a network, the
Embedded Web Service icon is enabled.

Contents area

Displays information about the selected machine, remaining
toner level, and paper. The information will vary based on the
machine selected. Some machines do not have this feature.

Order supplies Click on the Order button from the supply ordering window. You
can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from online.

- 86 -

Advanced settings user interface overview
The advanced user interface is intended to be used by the person responsible for managing
the network and machines.
NOTE: Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or
models. If so, it is not applicable to your machine.

Device Settings
You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup, paper, layout,
emulation, network, and print information.

Scan to PC Settings
This menu includes settings to create or delete scan to PC profiles.
•

Scan Activation: Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the device.

•

Profile: Displays the scanning profiles saved on the selected device.

•

Basic tab: Contains general scan related settings and device settings

•

Image tab: Contains settings related to image alterations.

Fax to PC Settings
This menu includes settings related to the basic fax functionality of the selected device.
•

Disable: If Disable is On, incoming faxes will not be received on this device.

•

Enable Fax Receiving from Device: Enables faxing on the device and allow more
options to be set.

Alert Settings (Windows only)
This menu includes settings related to error alerting.
•

Printer Alert: Provides settings related to when alerts will be received.

•

Email Alert: Provides options relating to receiving alerts via email.

•

Alert History: Provides a history of device and toner related alerts.

- 87 -

Using Dell Printer Status
The Dell Printer Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine status.
•

The Dell Printer Status window and its contents shown in this user’s guide may
differ depending on the machine or operating system in use.

•

Available for Windows OS users only

Dell Printer Status overview
If an error occurs while operating, you can check the error from the Dell Printer Status. Dell
Printer Status is installed automatically when you install the machine software.
You can also launch Dell Printer Status manually. Go to the Printing Preferences, click the
Basic tab
Printer Status button.
These icons appear on the Windows task bar:

Icon

Mean

Description

Normal

The machine is in ready mode and experiencing no errors or
warnings.

Warning

The machine is in a state where an error might occur in the
future. For example, it might be in toner low status, which
may lead to toner empty status.

Error

The machine has at least one error.

- 88 -

Toner Level

You can view the level of toner remaining in each toner cartridge.
The machine and the number of toner cartridge(s) shown in the
above window may differ depending on the machine in use.
Some machines do not have this feature.

Option

You can set printing job alert related settings.

Order Supplies You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) from online.

User’s Guide

You can view the online User’s Guide.

Close the window.

- 89 -

Using Wireless Setup Utility
This program is for the wireless configuration.
NOTE: You can only use SetIP when your printer is connected to a network.
1

Connect the USB cable to your machine.

Print the Network Configuration page of the printer to see the current network
configuration.

From the Start menu, select Programs
Wireless Setup Utility.

Follow the instructions in the installation window.

Dell Printers

- 90 -

Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP

Uninstalling Software
You should remove the printer drivers if you are upgrading the software or if your driver
installation fails. You can remove the software using the "Installing Software in Microsoft®
Windows® Operating System" CD or the Windows uninstall option.
NOTE: Close all programs before uninstalling software, and then restart your
computer after uninstalling the software.
1

From the Start menu, select Programs
Dell Printers
Uninstall.
or Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP

Select the software you want to remove. Click Next.

Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP

The selected driver and all of its components are removed from your computer.
3

After the software is removed, click Finish.

- 91 -

Embedded Web Service
Embedded Web Service
What is Embedded Web Service
Required web browser
Logging into Embedded Web Service
Embedded Web Service overview

- 92 -

Embedded Web Service
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the network environment
through Embedded Web Service. Enables you to monitor the status of your network printer
without leaving your desk.

What is Embedded Web Service
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP network parameters
correctly, you can manage the machine via Embedded Web Service. Use Embedded Web
Service to:
•

View the machine’s device information and check its current status.

•

Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.

•

Change the printer preference.

•

Set the email notifications advising of the machine’s status.

•

Get support for using the machine.

•

Upgrade machine software.

Required web browser
You need one of the following web browsers to use Embedded Web Service.
•

Internet Explorer® 8.0 or higher

•

Chrome 4.0 or higher

•

FireFox 3.0 or higher

•

Safari 3.0 or higher

- 93 -

Logging into Embedded Web Service
Before configuring options in Embedded Web Service, you need to Log in as an
administrator. You can still use Embedded Web Service without Logging in but you won’t
have access to Settings tab and Security tab.
1
2

Click Login on the upper right of the Embedded Web Service website.
Type in the ID and Password then click Login.
•
•

ID: admin
Password: admin

Embedded Web Service overview

NOTE: Some tabs may not appear depending on your model.

Information tab
This tab gives you general information about your machine. You can check things, such as
remaining amount of toner. You can also print reports, such as an error report.

Active Alerts
You can check the current alerts in the machine. Use this information to troubleshoot
machine errors.
You can view all the alerts in details by clicking the Expand All button. Click
on the Collapse All button to close the alert list.
•

Severity : Shows the severity of the alert.

•

Status Code : Shows the machine alert status code. This code is for service
representatives; this code to the service person when calling for service.

•

Description : Shows the description of the alert.

•

Skill Level : Shows the level of skill required to fix the problem.

Supplies
You can check the supplies’ information. For toner cartridges and imaging units, supplies’
status is displayed with a visual graph showing you the amount of each supply left. Page
counts are also available which can help you predict when to change the supplies.

- 94 -

Usage Counters
You can check the billing information and usage counter of the machine.
•

Billing Information : Shows the billing information such as machine’s serial number.

•

Counters : Shows the usage counter information by job types.

Current Settings
Shows the current settings of the machine and network.
•

•

Machine Information : Shows the current machine settings.
–

System : Shows the system related machine settings such as general settings and
detailed tray settings.

–

Printer : Shows printing related settings.

–

Copy : Shows copy related settings.

–

Fax : Shows fax related settings.

–

Scan to Email : Shows scan to email related settings.

–

Scan to Network Folder : Shows scan to network foler related settings.

–

Scan to FTP : Shows scan to FTP related settings.

–

Scan to USB : Shows scan to USB related settings.

–

Scan to Fax Server : Shows scan to fax server related settings.

–

Scan Security : Shows scan security related settings.

Network Information: Shows the current network settings. Use this page as a
reference and change the necessary settings needed for using the network.

Security Information
Shows the current security settings of the machine and network.

Print information
You can print all the reports provided by your machine. You can use these reports to help
you maintain your machine.

Address Book tab
You can manage the address book. This feature is also available from the machine.

Individual
You can manage individual entries in the address book.
Adding an individual address book entry
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the address book(Import /
Export). See "Logging into Embedded Web Service"

- 95 -

1
2

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Address Book tab

Individual.

Click the Add button above the list.
A pop-up window appears.

Enter the General information.

Enter the Email address.

Enter the Phone No..

Select the server(s) you are using among Network Folder, FTP and enter the necessary
server information. Click the Test button to test the server.

Click Apply.

Deleting an individual address book entry
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the address book. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Address Book tab

Check the checkbox(es) of the entry you want to delete from the list and click the
Delete button above the list.

When confirmation message appears, click OK.

Individual.

Editing an individual address book entry
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the address book. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Address Book tab

Click the Edit button above the list.

Individual.

A pop-up window appears.
3

Change the value as you want.

Click Apply.

Searching an individual address book entry
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the address book. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Address Book tab

Enter the key word for your search and from the drop down list select the category to
narrow your search.

Click the button.

Individual.

The search result appears on the list.
Importing an individual address book entry
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the address book. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"

- 96 -

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Address Book tab

Select Import from the Task drop down list. A pop-up window appears.

Select the way to find the location for address book.
•
•
–

Individual.

File : Click the Browse button to find the path for where the address book is
located.
Decryption
No Decryption : Import address list without decryption.

–

No Decryption without confidential : Imports address list without decryption and
confidential.

–

Decryption : Imports address list with decryption.

Click on OK.
A pop-up message showing the result appear. If you have failed try again.

Exporting an individual address book entry
You can export the address book as .csv file and save it on the computer.
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the address book. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Address Book tab

Select Export from the Task drop down list. A pop-up window appears.

Click on the Export button. A pop-up window appears.

Select the option you want and click the Export button.

The address book entry is saved as a .csv format. You can save or open the address
book entry.

Individual.

Group
You can manage group address books.
Adding a group address book
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the address book. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Address Book tab

Click the Add Group button above the list.

Groups.

A pop-up window appears.
3

Enter the group information.
If you want to add individual address book entries to the group address book, check
Add individual(s) after this group is created. You can add individuals to the group right
away with a pop-up window.

Click Apply.

- 97 -

Deleting a group
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the address book. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Address Book tab

Check the checkbox(es) of the group(s) you want to delete from the list and click the
Delete Group button above the list.

Click OK when confirmation window pops up.

Groups.

Editing a group
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the address book. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Address Book tab

Check the checkbox(es) of the group(s) you want to delete from the list and click the
Edit Group button above the list.

Groups.

A pop-up window appears.
3

Change the value as you want.

Click Apply.

Settings tab
Settings tab has sub menus, Machine Settings, Network Settings and Solution Settings.
You cannot view or access this tab if you do not Log in as an administrator. See "Logging
into Embedded Web Service"

Machine Settings
You can set machine related settings.
System
•

Setup: You can set general system related settings.

•

Input Tray : You can set paper size, type for each tray and other tray related settings.

•

Sound/Volume : You can set the volume for button sounds, notice alarms, and the
sound that occurs during a fax job.

•

Stamp: You can adjust the stamp on printouts.

•

Time : When you set the time and date, it will be used for sending/printing delayed
fax/print jobs or will be printed on reports

Printer
You can set copy related settings such as darkness or adjust the background.
•

General : You can set the basic settings for printing.

•

Graphic : You can set the Print Resolution for printing.

- 98 -

•

Layout : You can set paper layout related settings. For more information about the
options, refer to the setting this option from the machine.

•

PCL: You can set PCL font related settings.

•

PostScript : You can set PostScript related settings.

•

PDF : You can set PDF related settings.

•

XPS : You can set XPS related settings.

•

Font and Macro Download : You can download fonts and macro to the machine.

Copy
You can set copy related settings such as a darkness.
•

Change Default : You can set copy related default settings.

Fax
You can set fax related settings such as fax number or redial attempt.
•

General : You can set general fax related settings.

•

Change Default : You can set fax related default settings.

•

Received Fax Printing : You can set received fax printing related settings.
–

Received Fax Printing : Set the general fax settings.
- Print Duplex : Select to print received fax data on both sides of paper.
- Auto Reduction : Set to automatically reduce an incoming page. When
receiving a fax containing pages as long as or longer than the paper loaded in
the paper tray, the machine can reduce the size of the original to fit the size of
the paper loaded in the machine.
If you do not enable this option, the machine cannot reduce the original to fit
onto one page. The original will be divided and printed in actual size on two or
more pages.
- Discard Size : Enter the reduce size for reduction. The machine minuses the
specified segment set as the discard size. If you have selected Auto Reduction,
this option is enabled.
- Stamp Received Name : You can stamp received name on print outs.

•

Send Forward : You can set the send fax forward related settings to enable the user to
forward sent faxes to other destinations such as Fax, Email, Network Foler, FTP. Fax
forwarding to several destinations is also possible.

•

Received Forward : You can set the receive fax forward related settings to enable the
user to forward received faxes to other destinations such as Fax, Email, Network Foler,
FTP. Fax forwarding to several destinations is also possible.

- 99 -

Adding a fax forwarding setting
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Settings tab
Fax
Send Foward.

Enter the necessary information.
–

Machine Settings

General
- Send Foward : Enable the send forward function.
- Attachment Format : Select the file format for the fax attachment.

–

Fax Forward To Email
- Default [From:] Address : Enter the sending person’s default address.
- Default Subject : Enter the default subject.
- Default Message : Enter the default message.

Forward List
Click on the Add button.

–

Fax Forward to : Select the destination to forward the fax.

–

Address : Enter the recipient’s address. You can load the address from the address
book by clicking the Loading Address Book . If you select FTP and SMB for the
destination, you can manually enter the information by clicking the Direct Input.

Click Apply.
Deleting a fax forwarding setting

1
2

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Settings tab
Fax
Send Foward.

Machine Settings

Select the setting you want to delete and click Delete.
A pop-up window appears.

A confirmation message appears, click OK.
The list is reloaded and the setting you deleted is removed from the list.

Editing a fax forwarding setting
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Settings tab
Fax
Send Foward.

Select the setting you want to edit and click Edit.
A pop-up window appears.

Change the value as you want.

Click Apply.

- 100 -

Machine Settings

Adding a fax forwarding setting
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Settings tab
Fax
Receive Forward.

Enter the necessary information.
–

Machine Settings

General
- Receive Forward : Enable the receive forward function.
- Attachment Format : Select the file format for the fax attachment.
- Forward & Print : If you want to forwarding with printing, click Enable burton.

–

Fax Forward To Email
- Default [From:] Address : Enter the sending person’s default address.
- Default Subject : Enter the default subject.
- Default Message : Enter the default message.

Forward List
Click on the Add button.

–

Fax Forward to : Select the destination to forward the fax.

–

Click Apply.
Deleting a fax forwarding setting

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Settings tab
Fax
Receive Fax Foward.

Select the setting you want to delete and click Delete.

Machine Settings

A pop-up window appears.
3

A confirmation message appears, click OK.

The list is reloaded and the setting you deleted is removed from the list.
Editing a fax forwarding setting

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Settings tab
Fax
Fax Foward.

Select the setting you want to edit and click Edit.
A pop-up window appears.

Change the value as you want.

Click Apply.

- 101 -

Machine Settings

Scan To Email
You can settings for scan to email feature.
NOTE: If outgoing email server is not configured, click the link under Outgoing Mail
Server (SMTP and configure the outgoing email server first.
–

General : Set the general scan to email settings.
- Default [From:] Address : Enter the default address to appear in the From
Address field.
- Default [To:] Address : Enter the default address to appear in the To Address
field.
- Default Subject : Enter the default subject to appear in the Subject field.
- Default Message : Enter the message to appear in the from Message field.
Check Use default message on Scan To Email if you want to use the default
message when sending emails.
- Advanced : Set the advanced scan to email settings.
- Edit [From] Address : Select whether to allow users to change the From
Address field.
- Replace [From] Address : Select whether to enable users to Replace default
[From] address with Email address of the authenticated user if possible.
- Send to Self : Select whether to enable auto send to self feature, which is
sending a copy of email to oneself.
-Print Confirmation Sheet : Select when to print the print confirmation sheet.

–

Change Default
You can set scan to Email related settings such as Resolution, Color, Format,
Duplex, Original Size and Original Type.

Scan To Network Folder
You can settings for scan to network folder feature.
–

General
- General : You can set the Server Connection Timout.You can set the time that
the system will wait before the server connection fails due to timeout. You can
set the time value between 1-300 second(s). The time value should be 30
seconds or more for reliable operation over congested enterprise networks.
- Scan to Network Folder : You can set the Print Confirmation Sheet.Select
when to print the print confirmation sheet.

–

Change Default
You can set scan to network folder related settings such as Resolution, Color,
Format, Duplex, Original Size, Original Type.

- 102 -

Scan To FTP
You can settings for scan to FTP feature.
–

General
- General : You can set the Server Connection Timout.You can set the time that
the system will wait before the server connection fails due to timeout. You can
set the time value between 1-300 second(s). The time value should be 30
seconds or more for reliable operation over congested enterprise networks.
- Scan to FTP : You can set the Print Confirmation Sheet.Select when to print
the print confirmation sheet.

–

Change Default
You can set scan to network folder related settings such as Resolution, Color,
Format, Duplex, Original Size and Original Type.

Scan To USB
You can settings for scan to USB feature.
–

Change Default
You can set scan to network folder related settings such as Resolution, Color,
Format, Duplex, Original Size, Original Type, Overwrite.

Scan To Fax Server
You can settings for scan to Fax Server feature.
–

General
- Default [From:] Address : Enter the default address to appear in the From
Address field.
- Default [To:] Address : Enter the default address to appear in the To Address
field.
- Customizing Field : Select the customizing field you want. If you select
[From:] Field, you could not use Default [From:] Address.

–

Change Default
You can set scan to network folder related settings such as Resolution, Color,
Format, Duplex, Original Size, Original Type.

Scan Security
You can set Scan related security settings.
–

General
- PC Scan Security : When using PC Scan or Scan To PC, Scan Data encryption
to save it.

- 103 -

Email & Fax
You can settings for Scan to Email and Fax.
–

Change Default
You can set scan to network folder related settings such as Email Settings-From:,
Email Settings-Subject:, Resolution, Color, Format, Duplex, Original Size,
Original Type, Darkness, Qualty.

Email Notification
When an error occurs or the consumables are running out, the machine sends a notification
to the administrator via Email. You can set whether to use this feature or not. You can also
select which alerts to receive and when.
•

General

•

Recipients & Conditions : You can view the list of alerts and add/delete/edit current
alerts.

–

Email Notification : Check to receive Email notification when there is an alert.

Adding an alert
1
2

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Settings tab
Email Notification.

Machine Settings

Click on the Add button under Recipients & Conditions.
A pop-up window appears.

Enter the recipients’ contact information under Recipients.

Select the alerts for which you want to receive notification from under Notifications.

Click Apply.

Network Settings tab
You can set up the network environment to use your machine as a network machine.
From the Embedded Web Service, select the Settings tab

Network Settings.

General
You can set general machine information to use in the network and set ethernet settings.
•

General : Set the general network settings.

•

Ethernet: Set the general ethernet settings.

TCP/IPv4
You can set IPv4 settings.
•

General : Set the general IPv4 settings.
–

IPv4 Protocol : Check to enable IPv4 protocol.

–

Assign an IP Address : Select the method for assigning an IP address.

- 104 -

- Manually : Select to enter IP address/Subnet Mask/ Gateway Address
manually.
- Automatically : IP address/Subnet Mask/ Gateway Address are automatically
allocated by BOOTP/DHCP Server.
NOTE: If you check Auto IP, when the BOOTP or DHCP fail to allocate IP
address/Subnet Mask/ Gateway Address after 2 minutes, the machine automatically
allocates a Link-Local IP address, which is the 169.254.0.0/16 set of addresses
defined in RFC 3927.
•

•

Domain Name : Set the DNS server settings.
–

Host Name : Shows the host name. You can change the name in Settings tab
Network Settings
General
Printer Name.

–

Domain Name: Enter the domain name. You can enter up to 128 characters.

–

Primary DNS Server : Enter the address of the DNS server you want to use
primarily.

–

Secondary DNS Server : Enter the address of the DNS server you want to use as
an alternative.

–

Dynamic DNS Registration : Check to enable dynamic DNS registration. If this
option is enabled, machine registers its host name and domain name to
configured DNS servers dynamically. Also, if this option is enabled and DHCP is
selected, DHCP FQDN options is automatically disabled.

WINS : Set the WINS server settings.
–

WINS Protocol : Check to enable WINS server.

–

Primary WINS Server : Enter the address of the WINS server you want to use
primarily.

–

Secondary WINS Server : Enter the address of the WINS server you want to use as
an alternative.

TCP/IPv6
You can set IPv6 settings.
•

General : Set the general IPv6 settings.
–

IPv6 Protocol : Check to enable IPv6 protocol.

–

Manual Address : Check to enter Address/Prefix manually.

•

The Assigned IPv6 Addresses : Shows the assigned IPv6 addresses.

•

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol version 6 (DHCPv6)
–

DHCPv6 Configuration : Select the DHCPv6 Configuration method.
- Use DHCP as directed by a router : DHCPv6 is enabled when a router
advertises to use DHCPv6.
- Always Enable DHCP : Regardless of router advertisement, use DHCPv6 to
acquire an IPv6 address.
- Never use DHCP : Disables DHCPv6.

- 105 -

•

Domain Name System version 6 (DNSv6)
–

Host Name : Shows the machine's host name.

–

IPv6 Domain Name : Enter the domain name. You can enter up to 128 characters.

–

Primary DNSv6 Server Address : Enter the address of the DNSv6 server you want
to use primarily.

–

Secondary DNSv6 Server Address : Enter the address of the DNSv6 server you
want to use as an alternative.

–

Dynamic DNSv6 Registration : Check to enable or disable dynamic DNSv6
registration.

Raw TCP/IP, LPR, IPP
You can set TCP/IP, LPR and IPP protocols for network printing.
•

•

Raw TCP/IP Printing
–

Raw TCP/IP Protocol : Check to enable Raw TCP/IP.

–

Port Number : Enter the port number of the machine for raw TCP/IP Printing. You
can change this port number whenever the network environment you are using
changes.

LPR/LPD
–

LPR/LPD Protocol : Check to enable LPR/LPD.

–

Port Number : Enter the port number of the machine for LPD Printing. You can
change this port number whenever the network environment you are using
changes.

Internet Printing Protocol (IPP)
–

IPP Protocol : Check to enable IPP.

–

Printer Name : Enter the printer name.

–

Network Path : Shows the printer URI.

AirPrint
You can set AirPrint related settings.
•

•

AirPrint : If you want to use AirPrint, check the Enable.
–

Friendly Name : Shows the friendly name used by AirPrint. The Friendly name will
be shown in Windows network when it detects a machine.

–

Location : Enter the machine location.

–

Geographical Location : You can set the geographic location.

•

Latitude : Enter the latitude.

•

Longitude : Enter the Longitude.

IPP Settings
–

Secure IPP : Link to Secure IPP settings.

–

Raw TCP/IP, LPR, IPP : Link to Raw TCP/IP, LPR, IPP settings.

- 106 -

•

Supplies Information : You can check the Supplies Information.

Google Cloud Print
You can set Google Cloud Print related settings.
•

Anonymous Registration
–

Printer Name : Enter the printer name you want.

–

Printer Description : Enter the printer description.

–

Proxy Setting : You can set the proxy server.
•

Enable Proxy : If you want to use proxy server, check the Enable.

•

Proxy IP : Enter the proxy IP.

•

Port : Enter the port.

–

Test Connection : You test the connection to proxy server.

–

Registration Status : You can check the registration status.

Telnet
You can set TCP/IP/IPv6, WINS, LPD, and Raw TCP/IP Printing protocols for network
printing.
•

Telnet Protocol : If you want to use telnet, check the Enable.
–

Port Number : Enter the port number of 1 to 65535. Default port is 23.

–

Password : Enter the password when connecting to print with telnet.

–

Confirm Password : Enter the password again.

WSD
If you are using Windows Vista® or later as an operating system, you can set WSD (Web
Service for Device) for searching the device on the network. You can also print from the
searched device.
•

WSD Protocol : Check to enable WSD protocol.

•

Port Number : Shows the port number.

SLP
You can set SLP for searching the device on the network.
•

SLP Protocol : Check to enable SLP protocol.

•

Port Number : Shows the port number.

•

Scope 1~3 : Enter the network scope to use, up to 3 scopeis can be set. Each machine
must always be in one or more scopes. You need scopes to group services that are
comparable to the network neighborhood in other systems.

•

Message Type : Select the message type.

•

SLP Multicast TTL : Enter the TTL value.

- 107 -

•

Registration Lifetime : Enter the life time of service registration when registering
services with DA.

•

SLP MTU : Enter the MTU(Maximum Transmission Unit) value.

•

Multicast Address : Shows the multicast address.

UPNP
Simple Service Discovery Protocol (SSDP) is the basic discovery protocol in UPnP and
provides a mechanism which network clients can use to discover network services. In
applications using SSDP as a discovery protocol, device may be identified by SSDP friendly
name.
•

SSDP Protocol : Check to enable SSDP protocol.

•

Port Number : Shows the port number.

•

SSDP TTL : Enter the packet time to live. Four is set as a default value.

•

Friendly Name : Shows the friendly name used by SSDP. The Friendly name will be
shown in Windows network when it detects a machine.

mDNS
Multicast DNS (mDNS) used in Bonjour (formerly Rendezvous) from Apple Inc., provides
similar functions to the normal unicast Domain Name System on the LAN without DNS
server.
•

mDNS Protocol : Check to enable mDNS protocol.

•

Port Number : Shows the port number used by mDNS.

•

mDNS Name : Shows the instance name used by the services for registering via mDNS.

•

Friendly Name : Shows the friendly name used by mDNS. The Friendly name will be
same as the link address used by the mDNS protocol and is shown in the Windows
network when it detects the machine.

CIFS (My Files)
NOTE: All files stored in My Files are not encrypted and can be accessed by all
users.
You can set scan to My Files settings.
•

•

CIF Server : If you want to use CIF Server, Check to enable.
–

Max Connection : You can set the available number of connecting user.

–

Anonymous : If you want to use everyone, check the Allow everyone to connect.

–

Password : Enter the password.

–

Confirm Password : Enter the password again.

–

If you want change the password, check the Change Password.

My Files Status : you can check the folder total size and available size.

- 108 -

SNMP
You can set SNMP related settings.

SNMPv1/v2
You can set SNMPv1/v2 settings.
•

General
–

•

SNMPv1/v2 Protocol : Check to enable SNMPv1/v2 protocol.

Community Name :
–

Adding the SNMP Community

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Settings tab
SNMP
SNMPv1/v2
Community Name.

Click the Add button.

Network Settings

A pop-up window appears.

•

Enter the necessary information.

Click Apply.

–

Deleting the SNMP Community

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Settings tab
SNMP
SNMPv1/v2
Community Name.

Check the checkbox of the name(s) you want to delete from the list and click the
Delete button above the list.

A confirmation window appears. Click on Yes.

Network Settings

–

Editing the SNMP Community

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Settings tab
SNMP
SNMPv1/v2
Community Name.

Check the checkbox of the name) you want to edit from the list and click the Edit
button above the list.

Change the necessary information.

Click Apply.

Network Settings

SNMP Traps :
–

Adding the SNMP traps

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Settings tab
SNMP
SNMPv1/v2
SNMP Traps.

Click the Add button.
A pop-up window appears.

Enter the necessary information.

Click Apply.

- 109 -

Network Settings

–

Deleting the SNMP traps

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Settings tab
SNMP
SNMPv1/v2
SNMP Traps.

Check the checkbox of the name(s) you want to delete from the list and click the
Delete button above the list.

A confirmation window appears. Click on Yes.

Network Settings

–

Editing the SNMP traps

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Settings tab
SNMP
SNMPv1/v2
SNMP Traps.

Check the checkbox of the name) you want to edit from the list and click the Edit
button above the list.

Change the necessary information.

Click Apply.

Network Settings

SNMPv3
You can set SNMPv3 settings.
•

General
–

•

SNMPv3 Protocol : Check to enable SNMPv3 protocol.

Authentication
–

User Name : Check to enable SNMPv3 protocol.

–

Authentication Password : Enter the password you want to use for
read-and-write authentication.

–

Confirm Password : Re-enter the password for confirmation.

–

Authentication Algorithm : Select authentication method.

Privacy
–

Privacy Password : Enter the password used to encrypt SNMPv3
request/response.

–

Confirm Password : Re-enter the Privacy Password for confirmation.

–

Privacy Algorithm : Shows the algorithm used to encrypt the SNMPv3
request/response. Only DES algorithm is supported, you can not change it
manually.

SNMP/iPrint
•

SNMP/iPrint
–

SNMP/iPrint : Select your operate system.

- 110 -

Outgoing Mail Server (SMTP)
You can set server settings for outgoing emails. If this setting is not configured, you cannot
use scan to email feature. Outgoing emails will be sent through SMTP server you set here.
•

•

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
–

SMTP Server : Enter the SMTP server address.

–

Port Number : Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535. 25 is set as a default
value.

SMTP Login Information
–

SMTP Requires Authentication : Check if you went to set authentication when
sending outgoing emails.

–

Password : Enter the password for authentication. You can enter up to 64
characters.

–

Confirm Password : Re-enter the Privacy Password for confirmation.

POP3 Authentication
–

SMTP Requires POP3 Before SMTP Authentication : You can set POP3
authentication to appear before SMTP client authentication usage. If you enable
this option, POP3 is required by the SMTP server first. Check to enable this option.

–

POP3 Server : Enter the POP3 server address.

–

Port Number : Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535. 110 is set as a
default value.

–

Password : Enter the password for authentication. You can enter up to 64
characters.

–

Confirm Password : Re-enter the Privacy Password for confirmation.

Advanced
–

Secure Email Connection with SSL/TLS : Check to enable this option if your
SMTP server supports SSL/TLS. When you are sending an Email from the machine,
your Email will be encrypted. TLS/SSL will make a secure channel between the
machine and the SMTP server.

–

SMTP Server Connection Timeout : You can set the time that system will wait
before the SMTP server connection fails due to timeout. You can set the time
value between 30~120 second(s). The time value should be 30 seconds or more
for reliable operation over congested enterprise networks. Thirty seconds are set
as a default.

–

Default [From:] Address : Enter the default address to appear in the From
Address field.

–

Maximum Message Size : You can set the maximum message size. If the scanned
document is larger than this message size, it will be split into multiple messages.

SMTP Configuration Test

- 111 -

–

Test : Click to test if the server works properly.

HTTP
You can allow or block users from accessing the Embedded Web Service.
•

HTTP Protocol : Check to allow user to access SyncThru™ Web Service.

•

Port Number : Shows the server port number.

Proxy
You can set proxy settings and enable authentication to connect to licence server through
http proxy server. These proxy settings are provided currently only if the administrator wants
to update an XOA application’s license online through proxy server.
•

•

Proxy Settings
–

Use Proxy : Check to enable proxy settings.

–

HTTP Proxy Server Address : Enter the HTTP proxy server address to use.

–

HTTP Proxy Server Port Number : Enter the HTTP proxy server port number to
use.

Proxy Authentication Settings
–

Enable : Check to enable proxy server authentication.

–

User ID : Enter the user ID for proxy server authentication.

–

Password : Enter the password for proxy server authentication.

Wireless (Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only)
You can set Wireless and WiFi settings.
Wireless
•

General
–

•

Wireless : Check to enable wireless.

Wireless Settings
–

Easy Wireless Settings : You can use Easy Wireless Settings.

Press Wizard .

Select Network Name(SSID) you want.

Click Next.

Shows wireless setup confirmation, click Apply.

Advanced Settings : You can set advanced settings. click Custom.
•

Power Save : Select on/off.

•

SSID : Select Search List dropdown list or enter the Insert New SSID.

•

Operation Mode : You can choose the operation mode.

•

Ad-hoc Channel : If you select the Ad-hoc operation mode, choose the
Ad-hoc channel.

- 112 -

•

Connection Status
–

Link Status : You can check the link status.

Wi-Fi DirectTM
•

Wi-Fi DirectTM
–

Wi-Fi DirectTM : Select Wi-Fi On / Off.

–

Device Name : Enter the device name.

–

IP Address : Enter the IP address.

–

Group Owner : You can active group owner.

–

Network Key : Enter your network key.

•
•

If you want to hide netwok key, check Hide Network Key.

Wi-Fi DirectTMStatus
–

Shows Wi-Fi status (Current Role, Current SSID, Current Status).

Solution Settings
You can set solution related settings. Before using this function, you need to enable in
Application Mnagement. See "Application Management"
Access Google Drive
•

•

General
–

Send Confirmation Report : You can set your printer to scan confirmation report
automatically.

–

File Prefix Name : You can set the prefix name.

–

Allow user to enter filename : You can set to allow users to enter the filename
On/Off.

Change Default
–

Scan to Google Drive : You can set Resolution, Color, Format, Duplex, Original
Size, Original Type, Overwrite and Create Folder.

–

Print From Google Drive : You can set Number of Copies, Auto Fit, Duplex and
Collation.

Auto Login User Lists
You can check and delete the auto Login lists.

My Calender
•

•

Change Default
–

Print Range : You can set the print range.

–

Number of Copies : You can set Number of Copies.

–

Tray : You can set Tray.

Auto Login User Lists

- 113 -

–

You can check and delete the auto Login lists.

Scan to SharePoint Online
•

•

General
–

Send Confirmation Report : You can set your printer to print and scan
confirmation report automatically.

–

File Prefix Name : You can set the file prefix name.

–

Allow user to enter filename : You can set to allow users to enter the filename
On/Off.

–

Scan to SharePoint Online List : You can Add, Delete, Edit the list. Enter the URL
you want on Add list.

Change Default
–

•

Scan to SharePoint Online : You can set Resolution, Color, Format, Duplex,
Original Size, Original Type, Overwrite and Create Folder.

Auto Login User Lists
–

You can check and delete the auto Login lists.

My Forms
•

•

Change Default
–

Scan to My Forms : You can set Resolution, Color, Format, Duplex, Original
Size, Original Type and Overwrite.

–

Print My Forms : You can set Number of Copies, Auto Fit, Duplex.

Bookmark : You can add, delete or edit bookmark.

Adding an Bookmark
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the bookmark. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1
2

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Settings tab
Bookmark.

My Forms

Click the Add button above the list.
A pop-up window appears.

Select the add type, if you select Add Folder, enter the Folder Name.
If you select Add Bookmark, go on to the next step.

Select add bookmark Type.
•
–

My Files
Bookmark Name : Enter the bookmark name you want.

–

My Files Path : Enter the file location path.

•
–

Network Folder
Bookmark Name : Enter the bookmark name you want.

- 114 -

–

URL : Enter the URL path.

–

Server Port : Enter the server port.

–

Domain : Enter the domain name.

•
–

FTP
Bookmark Name : Enter the bookmark name you want.

–

URL : Enter the URL path.

–

Server Port : Enter the server port.

Click Apply.

Deleting an Bookmark entry
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the bookmark. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Settings tab
Bookmark.

Check the checkbox(es) of the entry you want to delete from the list and click the
Delete button above the list.

When confirmation message appears, click OK.

My Forms

Editing an Bookmark entry
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the bookmark. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Settings tab
Bookmark.

Click the Edit button above the list.

My Forms

A pop-up window appears.
3

Change the value as you want.

Click Apply.

Searching an Bookmark entry
NOTE: You need to Log in as an administrator to manage the bookmark. See
"Logging into Embedded Web Service"
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Settings tab
Bookmark.

Enter the key word for your search and from the drop down list select the category to
narrow your search.

Click the Search (

) button.

The search result appears on the list.

- 115 -

My Forms

My Files
NOTE: All files stored in My Files are not encrypted and can be accessed by all
users.
•

Change Default
–

Scan to My Files : You can set Resolution, Color, Format, Duplex, Original Size,
Original Type and Overwrite.

–

Print from My Files : You can set Number of Copies, Auto Fit and Duplex.

Security tab
The security tab has System Security, Network Security, User Access Control and System
Log. You cannot access this tab if you do not Log in as an administrator.

System Security
From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab

System Security.

System Administrator
From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
Administrator.

System Security

System

System Security

Feature

Enter the system administrator’s information.
Feature Management
From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
Management.

You can enable/disable network features. Check the features you want to enable and click
Apply.
NOTE: If you want to connect through Secure HTTP (HTTPS), check both HTTP
and HTTPS.
Information Hiding
You can enable/disable information hiding features. Select the features you want to enable
and click Apply.
•

Hiding restriction option
–

Show All Information : If you check this button, show all information.

–

Show user’s own information only : If you check this burton, show user’s own
information only.

Restart Device
From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
Devive.

System Security

You can reboot your machine. Click the Restart Now button to reboot.

- 116 -

Restart

NOTE: If you reboot the machine, all the current jobs will be deleted. Close jobs
before rebooting.

Network Security
From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab

Network Security.

Digital Certificate
You can manage digital certificates. A digital certificate is an electronic certificate that
verifies the secure association between communication nodes. You need to add the
certificate for SSL communication.
•

You can view all the certificates in detail by clicking the Expand All button and
close them by clicking the Collapse All button.

•

To have safe communication between the Embedded Web Service and the
machine, add a certificate beforehand and check Secure HTTP to use the
machine in a safe and secure environment.

Adding a certificate
1
2

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
DigitalCertificate.

Network Security

Click the Add button.
A pop-up window appears.

Choose one of the following installation methods and add a certificate.
•
a

Create a Self-Signed Device Certificate
From the Install/Create Device Certificate or CSR, select Create a Self-Signed
Device Certificate and click Next.

Refer to the section on creating a new certificate and enter the necessary values.

Click Next and check the information, then click Close.

Check the created certificate from the list.

•
a

Install CA Signed Device Certificate
From the Install/Create Device Certificate or CSR, select Install CA Signed
Device Certificate and click Next.

Enter the certificate’s Friendly Name, Private Password, and Confirm Password.

Select the CA signed certificate using the Browse button.

Click Next and check the information.

Check the created certificate in the list.

- 117 -

•
a

Create Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
From the Install/Create Device Certificate or CSR, select Create Certificate
Signing Request (CSR) and click Next.

Refer to the section on creating a new certificate and enter the necessary values.

Copy the Certificate Signing Request information and acquire the certificate from
the certification server.

–

How to acquire the certificate from the certification server:
1. Open a web browser in the certification server and connect to
http://certification server’s IP address/certsrv/.
2. Select request a certificate.
3. Select advanced certificate request.
4. Select submit a certificate request by using a base-64-encoded CMC or
PKC ….
5. Paste the copied Certificate Signing Request information saved request and
select submit.
6. Acquire the certificate from the download certificate.

Find and upload the acquired certificate to by using the Browse button and the
Upload Certificate button.

•
a

Deleting a certificate
From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
DigitalCertificate.

Check the checkbox of the certificate(s) you want to delete from the list and click
the Delete button above the list.

The list is reloaded and the certificate you deleted is removed from the list.

•
a

Editing a certificate
From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
DigitalCertificate.

Check the checkbox of the certificate you want to edit from the list and click the
Edit button above the list.
A pop-up window appears.

Edit the necessary information.

Click Apply.

Secure Connection
You can set scure connection.
NOTE: To set a secure connection, Digital Certificate is required.

- 118 -

Network Security

SNMPv3
See "SNMPv3".
IP Security
You can set to enable or disable IPSec connection. Also you can check IPSec status.
IP/MAC Filtering
You can set filtering options for IP and MAC addresses. If the administrator does not add a
filtering rule for IPv4, IPv6, and MAC addresses, nothing is filtered. If the administrator has
added a filtering rule, filtering will be applied to the entered IPv4, IPv6, and MAC addresses.
IPv4 Filtering
You can enable/disable IPv4 filtering as well as manage filtering rules.
IPv6 Filtering
You can enable/disable IPv6 filtering as well as manage filtering rules.
MAC Filtering
You can enable/disable Mac filtering as well as manage filtering rules.
802.1x
You can enable/disable 802.1x Security.See"802.1x"

External Authentication Server
Set the servers for authentication.
Kerberos Sever
You can set Kerberos server settings.
Adding a Kerberos server
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
External Authentication Server
Kerberos Server.

Click the Add button.

Network Security

A pop-up window appears.
3

Enter the necessary information.
•
–

Required Information
Realm : Enter the default realm.

–

Server Address : Enter the default server address.

–

Port Number : Enter the default port number. 88 is set as a default value.

–

Make to Default Server : Check to set the server as the default server.

•

Additional Information

- 119 -

–

Backup Server : Enter the back up server address.

–

Port Number : Enter the backup port number. 88 is set as a default value.

Click Apply.

Deleting a Kerberos server
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
External Authentication Server
Kerberos Server.

From the Kerberos server list, check the server(s) you want to delete.

Click the Delete button.

A confirmation message appears, click Yes.

Network Security

Editing a Kerberos server
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
External Authentication Server
Kerberos Server.

From the Kerberos server list, check the server(s) you want to edit.

Network Security

A pop-up window appears.
3

Change the necessary information.

Click Apply.

Testing a Kerberos server
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
External Authentication Server
Kerberos Server.

From the Kerberos server list, check the server you want to test.

Network Security

NOTE: The server to be tested should be selected from the list of servers that were
added by using the adding a server feature.
3

Click the Test button.

SMB Server
You can set SMB server settings.
Adding a SMB server
1
2

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
External Authentication Server
SMB Server.

Network Security

Click the Add button.
A pop-up window appears.

Enter the necessary information.
•
–

Required Information
Domain : Enter the domain name to be used for Log in. You can enter up to 128
characters. You can only use ASCII 32 - 35, 37 - 63, 65 - 123, or 125 character sets.

–

Server Address : Enter the default server.

- 120 -

–

Port Number : Enter the default port number from 1 to 65535. 445is set as a
default value.

•

Standard port number for SMB over NetBIOS is 139.

•

Standard port number SMB over TCPIP direct is 445.

–

Make to Default Server : Select to make it a default server.

•
–

Additional Information
Backup Server : Enter the backup server.

–

Port Number : Enter the backup port number from 1 to 65535. 445is set as a
default value.

Click Apply.

Deleting a SMB server
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
External Authentication Server
SMB Server.

From the SMB server list, check the server(s) you want to delete.

Click the Delete button.

A confirmation message appears, click Yes.

Network Security

Editing a SMB server
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
External Authentication Server
SMB Server.

From the SMB server list, check the server(s) you want to edit and click Edit.

Network Security

A pop-up window appears.
3

Change the necessary information.

Click Apply.

Testing a SMB server
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
External Authentication Server
SMB Server.

From the SMB server list, check the server you want to test.

Network Security

NOTE: The server to be tested should be selected from the list of servers that were
added by using the adding a server feature.
3

Click the Test button.

LDAP Server
You can set LDAP server settings.
Adding a LDAP server
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
External Authentication Server
LDAP Server.

- 121 -

Network Security

Click the Add button.
A pop-up window appears.

Enter the necessary information.
•
–

LDAP Server
LDAP Server : Enter the server address.

–

Port Number : Enter the server port number from 1 to 65535. 389 is set as a
default value.

–

Match User’s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute : Select the attribute.

•
–

LDAP User Search
Search Root Directory : Enter search root directory which is the top search level
of the LDAP directory tree. You can enter up to 64 characters.

–

Authentication methods : Select the authentication method for accessing the
LDAP Server during the address book search.
- Anonymous : Select to allow users without Logging in.
- Simple : Select to set the password for Logging in. If you select Simple, enter
the following information.

•

Password : You can enter up to 64 characters.

•

Confirm Password : Re-enter the password for confirmation.

•

Append Root to Base DN : Select whether to enable or disable append root
to base DN.

–

Max No. of Searches : You can set the maximum number of results that need to
be returned during LDAP address book search.

–

Search Timeout : You can set the maximum search timeout for LDAP address
book search.

–

LDAP Referral : Select whether to turn on or off the LDAP Referral. If this option is
ON, LDAP client will search referral server if the LDAP server has no data to reply
to query and if the LDAP server has a referral server.

–

Search By : Select the category you want to use for searching.

–

LDAPs : Check to enable LDAPs.

Click Apply.

Deleting a LDAP server
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
External Authentication Server
LDAP Server.

From the LDAP server list, check the server(s) you want to delete.

Click the Delete button.

A confirmation message appears, click Yes.

- 122 -

Network Security

Editing a LDAP server
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
External Authentication Server
LDAP Server.

From the LDAP server list, check the server(s) you want to edit and click Edit.

Network Security

A pop-up window appears.
3

Change the necessary information.

Click Apply.

Testing a LDAP server
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
External Authentication Server
LDAP Server.

From the LDAP server list, check the server you want to test.

Click the Test button.

Network Security

802.1x
You can enable 802.1x authentication, which is a port-based authentication. If this
authentication is enabled, the machine is not allowed to access through the protected side
of the network until the machine is authorized. Use this feature to protect your network.
802.1x Security
•

802.1x Security : Check to enable this feature.

•

Authentication Algorithm : Select the authentication algorithm to use.
–

EAP-MD5 : Offers minimal security. The MD5 hash function is vulnerable to
dictionary attacks, and does not support key generation.

–

PEAPv0/EAP-MS-CHAPv2 : Recommended for users who only intend to use
Microsoft desktop clients and servers. For other users, it is not recommended.

–

EAP-MS-CHAPv2 : MS-CHAPv2 provides two-way authentication between peers
by combining a peer Challenge message with the Response packet and an
authenticator Response message on the Success packet.

–

TLS : This is used to provide secure communication over the Internet between a
client and server.

•

Credentials : Enter the User Name, Password, and Confirm Password to use for the
authentication.

•

Server Validation : select/unselect the certificate to use for validation. This option
appears when you select PEAPv0/EAP-MS-CHAPv2 or TLS.

User Access Control
You can restrict users from accessing the machine or application. You can also give specific
permission for user to only use certain feature of the machine. For example, you can allow
user A to only use print feature. In this case, user A will not be able to scan, copy or fax with
the machine.

- 123 -

Authentication (Activating access control)
From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
Authentication.

User Access Control

You can choose the authentication method for user authentication. Select a mode and click
on the Options button.
•

•

Mode
–

Basic Authentication : Activate basic authentication. Users are asked to Log in
when they select options that are only available to administrators. Those options
are marked with “a” or “(administrator only)” in this guide.

–

Device Authentication : Activate device authentication. Device authentication
requests user to Log in before using the device. Users cannot use any application
without Log in. Press the Edit Application button and select the feature to
enable/disable authentication.

–

Application Authentication : Activate application authentication. An administrator
can choose the application(s) to require user to Log in to use. Users cannot use
the selected application(s) without Logging in. Press the Edit Application button
and select the application(s) to enable/disable authentication.

Application State
–

•

Edit Application : Select the feature/application you want to enable/disable
authentication. This option is available only for Device Authentication and
Application Authentication.

AA Method : Select the authentication method from the list.
•
–

Options button
Log in Identification : Select the options for Logging in.

–

Password Expiration Period : Select whether to set an expiration period for the
password.

–

Password Policy : Select the password policy. If you enable the Apply strong
password, the password should be at least 8 characters long and it should be a
combination of letters, numbers, and special characters (except for <,>,”,\).If you
select Remote Authentication,

•

Log out Policy : Select when to log users out.

•

–

Force to log out : Select to automatically log users out when a job is completed.

–

No log out : Select to allow users to Log out manually.

–

Log out reminder : Select to show users a Log out request message when a job is
completed.

Log out Time : Select the time for automatic Log out. When there are no jobs in
process or no input for the selected time, the system Logs out automatically Logs out.

- 124 -

User profile
You can store user information on the machine’s hard drive. You can use this feature to
manage the users using the machine. You can also group the users and manage them as a
group. You can add up to 20 entries. User identified by user ID and password are allowed to
modify their password. They are allowed to view all of their profile information. When it
comes to the role, users are allowed to see only the role they belong to but not its
permissions.
Adding a user profile
1
2

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
User Profile .

User Access Control

Click the Add button.
A pop-up window appears.

Enter the necessary information.
NOTE: If you group a user in a group with ADMIN rights, the user will be able to
use the same ADMIN rights.

Click Apply.

Deleting a user profile
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
User Profile
Individual .

Check the checkbox of the role you want to delete from the list and click the Delete
button above the list.

User Access Control

NOTE: There should be at least one person or a group with ADMIN rights, and
it cannot be deleted.
3

Click OK when confirmation window pops up.
The list is reloaded and the profile you deleted is removed from the list.

Editing a user profile
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
User Profile
Individual .

Check the checkbox of the role you want to edit from the list and click the Edit button
above the list.
A pop-up window appears.

Edit the necessary information.

Click Apply.

- 125 -

User Access Control

System Log
You can keep logs of events that have happened in the machine. The administrator can
record and manage the machine usage information by keeping the system log files. The
system log files are stored on the machine’s HDD (hard disk drive), and when it is full, it will
erase old data. Export and save the important audit data separately using the exporting
feature.
Log configuration
You can enable or disable keeping logs. You can also backup log files by periods and
transfer to a repository server.
•

•

Log Configuration
–

Job Log : Check to keep job logs.

–

Operation Log : Check to keep operation logs like system boot up.

–

Security Event Log : Check to keep security event logs (user authentication,
view/delete log data).

Log Backup
–

Log Backup : Check to backup the log files.

–

Schedule : Check the period to backup.

–

Time : Check the time period to backup.

–

Protocol : Select the server to store the backup files.

–

Server Address : Enter the server address.

–

Server Port : Enter the port number.

–

Login Name : Enter the Log in name to use for Logging into the server. If you want
to allow anyone to access the server, check Anonymous.

–

Password : Enter the password.

–

Confirm Password : Re-enter the password for confirmation.

–

Domain : Enter the domain name. Depending on the protocol you select, this field
may not be available.

–

Path : Enter the path for saving the log backup file.

–

Manual backup : Backup immediately with the current settings. If you backup
manually, the settings will not be saved.

- 126 -

Log Viewer
You can view, delete, and search log files.
Viewing the log file
You can view, delete, and search log files.
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
Viewer.

Click the log file or click the Expand All button.

Click the Collapse All button to close the log file.

System Log

Log

System Log

Log

Deleting the log file
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
Viewer.

Check the checkbox(es) of the log file(s) you want to delete and click the Delete
button.

A confirmation message appears, click OK.

Searching the log file
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
Viewer.

Enter the keyword in the field, and select the category from the drop-down list next to
it. The list is reloaded.

System Log

Log

Exporting the log file
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Security tab
Viewer.

Check the checkbox(es) of the log file(s) to export and select Export from the Task
drop-down list.
A pop-up window appears.

Select the destination of the file you want and click Export.
NOTE: The file will be saved as in .csv format

Save the file.

Click Close.

- 127 -

System Log

Log

Maintenance tab
This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware, managing
applications, and setting contact information for sending emails. You can also connect to
the Dell website or download manuals and drivers by selecting the Link menu.

Firmware Upgrade
You can check the firmware version used in the machine. Check the version and update it if
necessary.
Checking the firmware version.
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Maintenance tab

Check the firmware version.

Firmware Upgrade.

Application Management
You can manage the applications.
Application
You can add/delete/enable/disable applications. But, OOB features cannot be added or
deleted.
Adding an application
You can add applications.
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Maintenance tab
Management
Application.

Click the Add button.

Application

A pop-up window appears.
3

Find the application file by entering the URL or by using the Browse button.

Click OK.

Deleting an application
You can delete applications.
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Maintenance tab
Management
Application.

From the list, select the application(s) you want to delete and click Delete.

A confirmation message appear, click OK.

Application

The list is reloaded and the application you deleted is removed from the list.
4

Click OK.

- 128 -

Enabling/Disabling an application
You can enable or disable applications.
1

From the Embedded Web Service, select the Maintenance tab
Management
Application.

From the list, select the application you want to view in details and press Setting.

A window where you can choose to enable/disable appears. Select the option you
want.

Press OK.

Application

Erase Stored Job
You can delete secure printing job and stored printing job.

Cloning
You can import or export (transfer) various settings (machine setting, network information,
address book, etc.) between devices that have the Cloning feature in Embedded Web
Service.

Contact Information
Shows information of a system administrator.

General Settings
You can set Asset Tag.

Weblink Options
Shows links to useful sites where you can download or check information. You can also add
useful sites.

- 129 -

Paper Handling
Print Media Guidelines
Storing Print Media
Identifying Print Media Sources and Specifications
Selecting an Output Location
Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray
Using the MPF (Multi purpose feeder)
Setting the Paper Size
Setting the Paper Type
Setting the Paper Margin
Setting the Paper Tray

- 130 -

Print Media Guidelines
Print media is paper, card stock, transparencies, labels, and envelopes. Your printer provides
high quality printing on a variety of print media. Selecting the appropriate print media for
your printer helps you to avoid printing problems. This chapter provides information on how
to help you make print media selections, how to care for the print media, and how to load it
in the tray 1, optional tray 2, or MPF.

Paper
For the best print quality, use 80 g/m2 (20 lb) xerographic, long grain paper. Try a sample of
any paper you are considering using with the printer before buying large quantities.
When loading paper, note the recommended print side on the paper package, and load the
paper accordingly. See "Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray" and "Using the MPF (Multi
purpose feeder)" for detailed loading instructions.

Paper Characteristics
The following paper characteristics affect print quality and reliability. We recommend that
you follow these guidelines when evaluating new paper stock.
Weight
The printer can automatically feed paper weights from 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb bond)
grain long in the DADF and from 60 to 105g/m2 (16 to 24 lb bond) grain long in the paper
tray. Paper lighter than 60 g/m2 (16 lb bond) may not be stiff enough to feed properly,
causing jams. For best performance, use 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond) long grain paper.
For duplex printing, use 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb bond) paper.
Curl
Curl is the tendency of print media to curve at its edges. Excessive curl can cause paper
feeding problems. Curl usually occurs after the paper passes through the printer, where it is
exposed to high temperatures. Storing paper unwrapped in humid conditions, even in the
paper tray, can contribute to paper curling prior to printing and can cause feeding
problems.
Smoothness
The degree of smoothness of the paper directly affects the print quality. If the paper is too
rough, the toner does not fuse to the paper properly, resulting in poor print quality. If the
paper is too smooth, it can cause paper feeding problems. Smoothness should be between
100 and 300 Sheffield points; however, smoothness between 150 and 250 Sheffield points
produces the best print quality.

- 131 -

Moisture Content
The amount of moisture in the paper affects both print quality and the ability of the printer
to feed the paper properly. Leave the paper in its original wrapper until you are ready to use
it. This limits the exposure of the paper to moisture changes that can degrade its
performance.
Grain Direction
Grain refers to the alignment of the paper fibers in a sheet of paper. Grain is either long
grain, running the length of the paper, or short grain, running the width of the paper.
For 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb bond) paper, grain long fibers are recommended. For papers
heavier than 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond), grain short is preferred. For the MPF, 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to
24 lb bond) paper, grain long fibers are recommended.
Fiber Content
Most high-quality xerographic paper is made from 100% chemically pulped wood. This
content provides the paper with a high degree of stability resulting in fewer paper feeding
problems and better print quality. Paper containing fibers such as cotton possess
characteristics that can result in degraded paper handling.

Recommended Paper
To ensure the best print quality and feed reliability, use 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond) xerographic
paper. Business papers designed for general business use may also provide acceptable print
quality.
Always print several samples before buying large quantities of any type of print media. When
choosing any print media, consider the weight, fiber content, and color.
Use only paper which can withstand these temperatures without discoloring, bleeding, or
releasing hazardous emissions. Check with the paper manufacturer or vendor to determine
whether the paper you have chosen is acceptable for laser printers.

Unacceptable Paper
The following papers are not recommended for use with the printer:
•

Chemically treated papers used to make copies without carbon paper, also known as
carbonless papers, carbonless copy paper (CCP), or no carbon required (NCR) paper

•

Preprinted papers with chemicals that may contaminate the printer

•

Preprinted papers that can be affected by the temperature in the printer fuser

•

Preprinted papers that require a registration (the precise print location on the page)
greater than ±0.09 in., such as optical character recognition (OCR) forms

•

Coated papers (erasable bond), synthetic papers, thermal papers

•

Rough-edged, rough or heavily textured surface papers or curled papers

•

Recycled papers containing more than 25% post-consumer waste that do not meet DIN
19 309

•

Recycled paper having a weight less than 60 g/m2 (16 lb)

•

Multiple-part forms or documents

- 132 -

Selecting Paper
Proper paper loading helps prevent jams and ensures trouble-free printing.
To help avoid jams or poor print quality:
•

Always use new, undamaged paper.

•

Before loading paper, know the recommended print side of the paper you are using.
This information is usually indicated on the paper package.

•

Do not use paper that you have cut or trimmed yourself.

•

Do not mix print media sizes, weights, or types in the same source; mixing results in
jams.

•

Do not use coated papers.

•

Remember to change the paper size setting when you use a source that does not
support auto size sensing.

•

Do not remove trays while a job is printing.

•

Ensure that the paper is properly loaded in the source.

•

Flex paper back and forth. Do not fold or crease the paper. Straighten the edges on a
level surface.

Selecting Preprinted Forms and Letterhead paper
Use the following guidelines when selecting preprinted forms and letterhead paper for the
printer:
•

Use long grain papers for best results.

•

Use only forms and letterheads printed using an offset lithographic or engraved
printing process.

•

Choose papers that absorb ink, but do not bleed.

•

Avoid papers with rough or heavily textured surfaces.

Use papers printed with heat-resistant inks which have been designed for use in
xerographic copiers. The ink must withstand temperatures of 180°C (356°F) without melting
or releasing hazardous emissions. Use inks that are not affected by the resin in the toner or
the silicone in the fuser. Inks that are oxidation-set or oil-based should meet these
requirements; latex inks might not. If you are in doubt, contact your paper supplier.
Preprinted papers such as letterheads must be able to withstand temperatures up to 180°C
(356°F) without melting or releasing hazardous emissions.

- 133 -

Printing on a Letterhead paper
Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether the preprinted letterhead
paper that you have chosen is acceptable for laser printers.
Page orientation is important when printing on a letterhead paper. Use the following table
for help when loading a letterhead paper in the print media sources.
Print Media
Source

Top of Page
Print Side

Tray 1 (standard Print side face down for simplex
tray)
(single sided) printing

Portrait

Landscape

Front of tray

Left side of tray

Logo enters
the printer
first

Left side of tray

Optional tray 2

MPF

Face up

Selecting Prepunched Paper
Prepunched paper brands can differ in the number and placement of holes and in
manufacturing techniques.
Use the following guidelines to select and use prepunched paper:
•
•
•

Test paper from several manufacturers before ordering and using large quantities of
pre-punched paper.
Paper should be punched at the paper manufacturer and not drilled into paper already
packaged in a ream. Drilled paper can cause jams when multiple sheets feed through
the printer.
Prepunched paper can include more paper dust than standard paper. Your printer may
require more frequent cleaning and feed reliability may not be as good as that of
standard paper.

- 134 -

Transparencies
Try a sample of any transparencies you are considering using with the printer before buying
large quantities:
•

Use transparencies designed specifically for laser printers. Transparencies must be able
to withstand temperatures of 180°C (356°F) without melting, discoloring, offsetting or
releasing hazardous emissions.

•

Avoid getting fingerprints on the transparencies, as this can cause poor print quality.

•

Before loading transparencies, fan the stack to prevent the sheets from sticking
together.

•

Load one transparency at a time into the MPF.

Selecting Transparencies
The printer can print directly on transparencies which have been designed for use in laser
printers. Print quality and durability depends on the transparency used. Always print samples
on the transparencies you are considering before buying large quantities.
Check with the manufacturer or vendor to determine whether your transparencies are
compatible with laser printers that heat transparencies to 180°C (356°F). Use only
transparencies that are able to withstand these temperatures without melting, discoloring,
offsetting, or releasing hazardous emissions.

Envelopes
Try a sample of any envelopes you are considering using with the printer before buying large
quantities. See "Using the MPF (Multi purpose feeder)" for instructions on loading an
envelope.
When printing on envelopes:
•

To achieve the best possible print quality, use only high-quality envelopes that are
designed for use in laser printers.

•

For best performance, use envelopes made from 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond) paper. You can
use up to 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond) weight for the MPF as long as the cotton content is 25
percent or less.

•

Use only new, undamaged envelopes.

•

For best performance and to minimize jams, do not use envelopes that:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Have excessive curl or twist
Are stuck together or damaged in any way
Contain windows, holes, perforations, cutouts or embossing
Use metal clasps, string ties, or metal folding bars
Have an interlocking design
Have postage stamps attached
Have any exposed adhesive when the flap is in the sealed or closed position
Have nicked edges or bent corners
Have rough, cockle, or laid finishes

- 135 -

•

Use envelopes that can withstand temperatures of 180°C (356°F) without sealing,
excessive curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions. If you have any doubts
about the envelopes you are considering using, check with the envelope supplier.

•

Adjust the width guide to fit the width of the envelopes.

•

Load an envelope with the flap side down and with the stamp area on the top left side.
The end of the envelope with the stamp area enters the MPF first.
See "Using the MPF (Multi purpose feeder)" for instructions on loading an envelope.

NOTE: You can improve the printing quality of envelopes by pulling down the
rear door to open and pushing the two blue pressure levers down. This
instruction will be especially helpful for DL and C5 size envelopes.

•

A combination of high humidity (over 60%) and the high printing temperatures may
seal the envelopes.

- 136 -

Labels
Your printer can print on many labels designed for use with laser printers. These labels are
supplied in letter size, A4 size, and legal size sheets. Label adhesives, face sheet (printable
stock), and topcoats must be able to withstand temperatures of 180°C (356°F) and pressure
of 25 pounds per square inch (psi). You can load one label sheet at a time in the MPF.
Try a sample of any label you are considering using with the printer before purchasing a
large quantity:
•

Use full label sheets. Partial sheets may cause labels to peel off during printing,
resulting in a jam. Partial sheets also contaminate your printer and your cartridge with
adhesive, and could void your printer and cartridge warranties.

•

Use labels that can withstand temperatures of 180°C (356°F) without sealing, excessive
curling, wrinkling, or releasing hazardous emissions.

•

Do not print within 0.04 in. (1 mm) of the edge of the label, of the perforations, or
between die-cuts of the label.

•

Do not use label sheets that have adhesive to the edge of the sheet. We recommend
zone coating of the adhesive at least 0.04 in. (1 mm) away from edges. Adhesive
material contaminates your printer and could void your warranty.

•

If zone coating of the adhesive is not possible, a 0.125 in. (3 mm) strip should be
removed on the leading and driver edge, and a non-oozing adhesive should be used.

•

Remove a 0.125 in. (3 mm) strip from the leading edge to prevent labels from peeling
inside the printer.

•

Portrait orientation is preferred, especially when printing bar codes.

•

Do not use labels that have exposed adhesive.

Card Stock
Card stock is single ply, and has a large array of properties, such as the moisture content,
thickness, and texture, that can significantly affect print quality. See "Identifying Print Media
Sources and Specifications" for information on the preferred weight for the grain direction
of print media.
Try a sample of any card stock you are considering using with the printer before purchasing
a large quantity:
•

Be aware that preprinting, perforation, and creasing can significantly affect the print
quality and cause print media handling or jamming problems.

•

Avoid using card stock that may release hazardous emissions when heated.

•

Do not use preprinted card stock manufactured with chemicals that may contaminate
the printer. Preprinting introduces semi-liquid and volatile components into the
printer.

•

We recommend the use of grain long card stock.

- 137 -

Storing Print Media
Use the following guidelines for proper print media storage. These help avoid print media
feeding problems and uneven print quality:
•

For best results, store print media in an environment where the temperature is
approximately 21°C (70°F) and the relative humidity is 40%.

•

Store cartons of print media on a pallet or shelf, rather than directly on the floor.

•

If you store individual packages of print media out of the original carton, ensure that
they rest on a flat surface so the edges do not buckle or curl.

•

Do not place anything on top of the print media packages.

Identifying Print Media Sources and
Specifications
The following tables provide information on standard and optional sources, including the
print media sizes that you can select from the paper size menu and supported weights.
NOTE: If you use a print media size not listed, select the next larger size.
Media Input Capacity
Papera

Paper Tray 1

Plain paper

250 sheets of 80 g/m2 520 sheets of 80 g/m2 50 sheet of 80 g/m2
bond (20 lb)
bond (20 lb)
bond (20 lb)

Transparencyc,
Labels, Cards,
Envelopes
a
b
c

Paper Tray 2

MPFb

5 sheets of 80 g/m2
bond (20 lb)

Recommend the use of manual for special media such as transparency, envelope, and card.
For special media in MPF, the feeding quality may be degraded depending on the status of
paper.
Recommend the use of short edge for the paper-backed transparency.

Media Output Capacity
Output Location

Description

Face down

150 sheets of 80g/m2 bond (20 lb) paper
5 sheets of transparency, envelope, label, and card.

Face upa

1 sheetb

- 138 -

a
b

The face up is mainly for envelope and thick paper.
Push the two blue pressure levers down for better printing quality of envelope, label, card, and
thick paper.

Print Media Sizes and Support
Dimensions
Legend
Y- indicates Support

Paper Tray
(tray 1 and
optional tray 2)

Print Media Size
A4

8.27 x 11.7 in.

MPF

Duplex
printing

(210 x 297 mm)
A5a

5.83 x 8.27 in.
(148 x 210 mm)

4.13 x 5.85 in.
(105 x 148.5 mm)

JIS B5

7.17 x 10.1 in.
(182 x 257 mm)

ISO B5

6.93 x 9.84 in.
(176 x 250 mm)

Letter

8.5 x 11 in.
(215.9 x 279.4 mm)

Legal

8.5 x 14 in.
(215.9 x 355.6 mm)

Executive

7.25 x 10.5 in.
(184.2 x 266.7 mm)

Oficio

8.5 x 13.5 in.
(216 x 343 mm)

Folio

8.5 x 13 in.
(216 x 330 mm)

Envelope Monarch

3.875 x 7.5 in.
(98.4 x 190.5 mm)

Envelope No.9

3.87 x 8.87 in.
(98 x 225 mm)

Envelope No.10

4.12 x 9.5 in.
(105 x 241 mm)

- 139 -

Legend
Dimensions
Y- indicates Support

Paper Tray
(tray 1 and
optional tray 2)

Print Media Size
Envelope DL

4.33 x 8.66 in.

MPF

Duplex
printing

(110 x 220 mm)
EnvelopeC5

6.38 x 9.01 in.
(162 x 229 mm)

EnvelopeC6

4.49 x 6.38 in.
(114 x 162 mm)

Custom

3.86 x 5.85 in. to 8.5 x
14 in.
(98 x 149 mm to 216 x
356 mm)

Ensure the A5 paper is NOT A4 paper that has been cut in half.

Print Media Supported
Print Media (Paper) Types

Paper Tray
(tray 1 and optional tray 2)

MPF

Plain, Thin, Recycled

Thick, Bond, Card Stock , Archive

Preprinted

Color

Transparency

Labels

Thicker

Envelopes

Cotton

- 140 -

Print Media Types and Weights
Print Media

Type

Print Media Weight
Tray 1 and Optional Tray 2 MPF

Plain paper

Xerographic or
business paper

Envelopes 100%
Cotton Content

Sulfite,
wood-free or up
to 100% cotton
bonds

Thick paper

Xerographic or
business paper

Thicker paper

Thin paper

70 to 85 g/m2

(19 to 23 lbs bond)

(20-24 lb)

86 to 105 g/m2

(23 to 28 lbs bond)

Xerographic or
business paper

60 to 70 g/m2

(16 to 19 lbs bond)

Laser printer

Labels

Paper , Dual-web
paper ,Polyester ,
Vinyl

Bond paper

Minimum size
(custom)

Xerographic or
business paper

127 mm (3 x
5 inches)

• Tray 1/ Tray 2:
98x 148 mm

138 to 146 g/m2
(36.81 to 38.91 lbs
bond)
120 to 150 g/m2
(32 to 40 lbs bond)

Index Bristol , Tag 121 to 163 g/m2
, Cover
(32 to 43 lbs bond)

• MPF tray: 76 x

164 to 220 g/m2
(44 to 58 lbs bond)

Transparency

Card stock

75-90 g/m2

121 to 163 g/m2
(32 to 43 lbs bond)
106 to 120 g/m2
(28 to 32 lbs bond)

• Multi-purpose tray: 60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 58 lbs
bond)
• Tray 1/ Tray 2: 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lbs bond)

(3.84 x 5.84
inches)

- 141 -

Selecting an Output Location
The printer has two output locations; the output tray (face down) and the rear door (face
up).

Output Tray

Rear Cover

To use the output tray, ensure that the rear door is closed. To use the rear door, open it.
NOTE: If paper coming out of the output tray has problems, such as excessive curl,
try printing to the rear door.
NOTE: To avoid paper jams, do not open or close the rear door while the printer is
printing.

- 142 -

Printing to the Output Tray (Face down)
The output tray collects printed paper face-down, in the correct order. The tray should be
used for most print jobs.
If necessary, expand the paper output extension to keep the print media from falling off the
output tray.
CAUTION: The surface of the output tray may become hot if you print a large
number of pages at once. Make sure that you do not touch the surface, and do not
allow children near it.

Printing to the Rear Door (Face up)
Using the rear door, the paper comes out of the printer face up.
Printing from the MPF to the rear door provides a straight paper path. Using the rear door
might improve the output quality with special materials.
To use the rear door:
Open the rear door by pulling it.

- 143 -

CAUTION: The fuser area inside of the rear door of your printer becomes very hot
when in use. Take care when you access this area.

Loading Print Media in the Paper Tray
You can load approximately 250 sheets of plain paper in the tray 1 or the optional tray 2. If
you purchased the optional tray 2, see "Installing an Optional Tray 2" for installing
instructions. For faxing, you can use A4, letter or legal paper only. For copying or printing,
you can use many different types and sizes of paper; see "Identifying Print Media Sources
and Specifications".
Follow these instructions to load print media into the tray 1 or optional tray 2. These trays
are loaded the same way.
1

Pull open the paper tray and load paper with the print side face down.

You can load letterhead paper with the design side face down. The top edge of the
sheet with the logo should be placed at the front side of the tray.

For details about loading paper in the paper tray, see "Loading Paper".
NOTE: If you experience problems with paper feed, place the paper in the MPF.
NOTE: You can load previously printed paper. The printed side should be facing up
with an uncurled edge at the front. If you experience problems with paper feed,
turn the paper around. Note that the print quality is not guaranteed.

- 144 -

Using the MPF (Multi purpose feeder)
Use the MPF to print transparencies, labels, envelopes or postcards in addition to making
quick runs of paper types or sizes that are not currently loaded in the paper tray.
Postcards, 3.5 by 5.83 in. (index) cards and other custom-sized materials can be printed with
this printer. The minimum size is 3.0 by 5.0 in. (76 by 127 mm) and the maximum size is 8.5
by 14 in. (216 by 356 mm).
Acceptable print materials are plain paper with sizes ranging from 3.0 by 5.0 in. (76 by 127
mm) to Legal, 8.5 by 14 in. (216 by 356 mm), the largest size acceptable, and weighing
between 16 lb and 43 lb.
NOTE: Always load only the print materials specified in the Specifications on
"Identifying Print Media Sources and Specifications" to avoid paper jams and print
quality problems.
NOTE: Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes and labels before loading them into
the MPF.
To use the MPF:
1

Open the MPF and unfold the paper support extension, as shown.

If you are using paper, flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages
before loading.

For transparencies, hold them by the edges and avoid touching the print side. Oils
from your fingers can cause print quality problems.

- 145 -

Load the print material with the side to be printed on facing up.

Depending on the paper type you are using, keep the following loading method:
•

Envelopes: load them with the flap side down and with the stamp area on the top
left side.
•
Transparencies: load them with the print side up and the top with the adhesive
strip entering the printer first.
•
Labels: load them with the print size up and the top short edge entering the
printer first.
•
Preprinted paper: load with the design face up, top edge toward the printer.
•
Card stock: load them with the print side up and the short edge entering the
printer first.
•
Pre printed paper: the printed side should be facing down with an uncurled edge
toward the printer.
Squeeze the width guide and adjust it to the width of the print material. Do not force
too much, or the paper will be bent, which will result in a paper jam or skew.

- 146 -

After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the MPF. See "Setting the Paper
Type" for copying and faxing or "Paper Tab" for Computer printing.
NOTE: The settings made from the printer driver override the settings on the
operator panel.
CAUTION: Ensure that the rear door opens when you print on transparencies.
If not, they may tear while exiting the machine.

After printing, fold away the paper support extension and close the MPF.

Tips on using the MPF
•

Load only one size of print material at a time in the MPF.

•

To prevent paper jams, do not add paper when there is still paper in the MPF. This also
applies to other types of print materials.

•

Print materials should be loaded face up with the top edge going into the MPF first and
be placed in the center of the tray.

•

Always load only the print materials specified in "Print Media Guidelines" to avoid paper
jams and print quality problems.

•

Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading them into the MPF.

•

When you print on 3 by 5 in. (76 by 127 mm) sized media on the MPF, open the rear
door for a straight paper path to avoid paper jams.

•

Ensure that the rear door opens when you print on transparencies. If not, they may
tear while exiting the machine.

- 147 -

Setting the Paper Size
After loading paper in the paper tray, you need to set the paper size from the operator panel.
This setting will apply to Fax and Copy modes. For Computer printing, you need to select
the paper type in the application program you use.
1

Press My Settings

Press the paper tray you want to use.

Machine Setup

Press the Paper Size.

Press the paper size you are using.

Press the Check(

Paper Setup from the main screen.

) to complete.

Setting the Paper Type
After loading paper in the paper tray or the MPF, you need to set the paper type from the
operator panel. This setting will apply to Fax and Copy modes. For faxing, you can only set
the paper type to the Plain mode. For Computer printing, you need to select the paper type
in the application program you use.
1

Press My Settings

Press the paper tray you want to use.

Machine Setup

Press the Paper Type.

Press the paper type you are using.

Press the Check(

Paper Setup from the main screen.

) to complete.

Setting the Paper Margin
You can set the paper margin for simplex or duplex printing.
1

Press My Settings
screen.

Press the paper tray you want to use.

Machine Setup

Paper Setup

Margin from the main

Press the printing type you want to use.

Select a target such as Top Margin, Left Margin, Short Binding, Long Binding, and etc.
to set the paper margin.

Adjust the option you want using the left/right arrows

Press the Check(

) to complete.

- 148 -

Setting the Paper Tray
This feature allows you to select the tray and paper that you want to use for a printing job.
Paper size and paper tray are adjusted here.

Setting the Tray linking
If tray 1 and tray 2 are filled with letter size paper, when tray1 is empty and this option is On,
then the machine continues printing using the paper in tray 2.
1

Press My Settings

Machine Setup from the home screen.

Press the Tray Behavior.

Press Tray Linking.

Press the left/right arrows to select the On you want to use.

Press the home icon (

) to return to Home Screen.

Substitute Tray
When the paper is mismatched, meaning that tray 1 is filled with the letter size paper, but the
printing job needs A4 size paper, the machine automatically starts printing with Letter sized
paper.
1

Press My Settings

Machine Setup from the home screen.

Press the Tray Behavior.

Press the Substitute Tray.

Press the left/right arrows to select Nearest Size.

Press the home icon (

) to return to Home Screen.

Setting the Default Tray
You can select the tray you want to use for printing job.
1

Press My Settings

Machine Setup from the home screen.

Press the Tray Behavior.

Press the Default Source.

Press the left/right arrows to select the paper tray you are using.

Press the home icon (

) to return to Home Screen.

- 149 -

Setting the paper feeding flow
1

Press My Settings

Machine Setup from the home screen.

Press the Tray Behavior.

Press the Configure MPF.

Press the left/right arrows to select the paper tray you are using.
•

Tray Mode: When sending a print job from the computer, the printer uses paper in
the tray which you have already set in Printer properties. In this mode the MPF is
treated as another paper tray. Instead of treating MPF as first preference paper
source, printer pulls paper from the tray that matches the size and type. The first
preference goes to the default source.
•
Bypass Mode: When sending a print job from the computer and the MPF is filled
with paper, the printer uses the paper in the MPF first. In this mode the printer
pulls the paper from MPF first unless it is closed or empty. MPF gets the highest
priority and pulls whatever media present in the MPF. Bypass Mode is set as a
default setting.
Press the home icon (
) to return to Home Screen.

Setting the paper auto feeding
When the paper is mismatched, the machine waits for a while (about few seconds) and
starts printing automatically even if the paper mismatches.
1

Press My Settings

Press the Tray Behavior.

Machine Setup from the home screen.

Press the Auto Continue.

Press the left/right arrows to select the On you want to use.

Press the home icon (

) to return to Home Screen.

Substitute Size
This setting is used to determine whether the printer can substitute with another paper size
when the requested paper size is not available in any of the input trays. The Printer will
substitute A4/Letter, A5/Statement, B5/ISO B5, and Folio/Oficio. For example if A4 is
requested paper size and there is no A4 paper in any of the input source then the printer will
print on Letter size paper, if available.
Substitute size set to Off means no substitution is allowed for the requested paper size. This
option is not applied for received fax printing.
NOTE: You can use this feature in print and copy job.

Configure MPF
MPF can be configured to behave in Tray Mode or in Bypass Mode by setting the Configure
MPF menu in the operator panel.

- 150 -

Bypass Mode
In this mode the printer pulls the paper from MPF first unless it is closed or empty. MPF gets
the highest priority and pulls whatever media is present in the MPF.
NOTE: You can use this feature in print and copy job.

Tray Mode
In this mode the MPF is treated as another paper tray. Instead of treating MPF as first
preference paper source, printer pulls paper from the tray that matches the size and type.
The first preference goes to the default source.
NOTE: You can use this feature in print, copy, and fax job.

- 151 -

Printing
Printing a Document
Opening printing preferences
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of the Paper
Change Percentage of Your Document
Printing Posters
Printing Booklets
Printing on Both Sides of Paper
Using Watermarks
Using Overlays

- 152 -

Printing a Document
The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows 7.
1

Open the document you want to print.

Select Print from the File menu.

Select your machine from the Select Printer list.

Ensure that your printer is
selected.

Windows 7

Select the printer driver that you want to use from the Print window.

The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range are selected
within the Print window.

To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print window.

Canceling a Print Job
If the print job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler, cancel the job as follows:
•

You can access this window by simply double-clicking the machine icon
Windows task bar.

•

You can also cancel the current job by pressing

- 153 -

on screen.

in the

Opening printing preferences
•

The Printing Preferences window that appears in this user’s guide may differ
depending on the machine in use.

•

When you select an option in Printing Preferences, you may see a warning mark
or
. an
mark means you can select that certain option but it is not
recommended, and an
mark means you cannot select that option due to
the machine’s setting or environment.

Open the document you want to print.

Select Print from the file menu. The Print window appears.

Select your machine from the Select Printer.

Click Properties or Preferences.

NOTE: The screenshot may differ depending on model.

- 154 -

Basic Tab
The Basic tab provides options for you to adjust how the document appears on the printed
page. The Layout Options section includes advanced printing options, such as Multiple
Pages Per Side and Poster Printing.






Property

Orientation

Description
Orientation allows you to select the direction in which information is
printed on a page.
• Portrait prints across the width of the page, letter style.
• Landscape prints across the length of the page, spreadsheet style.
If you want to rotate the page 180-degrees, check Rotate 180
Degrees.

Landscape

Portrait

Layout
Options

Mirror Image specifies mirrored output. Check to print a mirror
image of the document by reversing the horizontal coordinates. This
feature is available only when using the PostScript (PS) driver.
Layout Options allows you to select advanced printing options. For
details, see "Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of the Paper",
"Printing Posters" and "Printing Booklets".

- 155 -

Property

Description

Double-Sided Double-Sided Printing allows you to print on both sides of paper. For
Printing
details, see "Printing on Both Sides of Paper".
Paper Tab
Use the following options to set the paper handling needs when you access the printer
properties. Click the Paper tab to access the paper properties.
NOTE: When you select an option in properties, you may see an exclamation ( )
mark or ( ) mark. An exclamation mark means you can select that certain option
but it is no recommended, and ( ) mark means you cannot select that option due
to the printer’s setting or environment.










- 156 -

Property

Print Mode

Description
Print Mode allows you to select how to print or save the printing file
by using the storage(mass storage device,printer memory,internal
flash drive, RAM Disk). Select the desired one of the following
settings:
Print Mode
• Normal: Select this setting for normal printing without storing your
documents in printer storage.
• Proof: This setting is available when you make more than two
copies. The printer prints the first copy, and then waits so that you
can check the printing if there is any problem. After checking, you
can continue printing the remaining copies.
• Confidential: Select this setting to send your private or confidential
document with a specified password to printer storage so that you
can prevent the other users from accessing it. To print the
document, you must enter the password. After printing, the
document is cleared from printer storage.
• Store : Select this setting to save a document in the hard disk
without printing. When you want to save your document in a private
document box, you must enter the password. Use this setting with a
private document box when you store a private or a confidential
document.
• Store and Print : Select this setting to save a document in the hard
disk and print it. When you want to save your document in a private
document box, you must enter the password. Use this setting with
private document box when you store a private or a confidential
document.
• Spool : This option can be useful to handle large amount of data. If
you select this setting, the print spools the document into printer
storage and then prints it from printer storage queue, decreasing the
computer's work load.
• Print Schedule : Select this setting to print the document at a
specified time. If you set the time to 11 PM when the printer is hardly
used, the printer stores the document in printer storage and prints it
at 11 PM.
The Job Properties options are available as below.
•

Job Name : Enter the name of the print job. It can be used when
you print the file at a later time or when find the saved file using
the printer's control panel.

•

User ID : Enter the user's ID. It can be used when you print the file
at a later time or when find the saved file using the printer's
control panel.

- 157 -

Property

Print Mode
(Continue)

Copies

Description
Password : Enter the password in which will be used for Confidential
setting. This setting is available only when you select Confidential,
Store or Store and Print with selecting any private document box. If
you set the password a specific file, you must enter the password to
print or delete the file.
Print At : Select this setting to set the time when the printer begins
printing. You can use this setting only if you select Print Schedule.
Copies allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed. You
can enter up to 999.

 Original Size The Original Size option allows you to choose the size of paper
/ Output Size
loaded in the paper tray.

If the required size is not listed in the Size box, click Edit.... When the
Custom Paper Size Setting window appears, set the paper size and
click OK. The setting appears on the list so that you can select it.

Source
Type
Advanced

The Output Size option allows you to choose the size of output
paper. You can choose drop/down list or set the Percentage.
Ensure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray.
If the paper source is set to Auto Select, the printer automatically
picks up print materials from the MPF first and then the paper tray.
Ensure that Type is set to Printer Default. If you load a different type
of print material, select the corresponding paper type. For more
information about print materials, refer to "Print Media Guidelines".
This property allows you to print the first page using a different paper
type from the rest of the document. You can select the paper source
for the first page. This feature is not available when using the
PostScript (PS) driver.
NOTE: If you click Reset, settings in the options returns to the
default setting.

- 158 -

Graphic Tab
Use the following graphic options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs.
Click the Graphic tab to display the properties shown below.







Property

Quality

Description
You can select the printing resolution by choosing from Best or
Normal. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed
characters and graphics. Higher settings may increase the time it
takes to print a document.

- 159 -

Property

 Font /

Text

Description
All Text Black
When the All Text Black option is checked, all text in your
document is allowed to print solid black, regardless of the color it
appears on the screen. When it is not checked, colored text is
allowed to print in shades of gray.
Advanced
True Type Options determines what the driver tells the printer
about how to image the text in your document. Select the
appropriate setting according to the status of your document.

• Download as Outline: When this option is selected, the driver will
download any TrueType fonts that are used in your documents,
which is not stored (resident) on your printer. If, after printing a
document, you find that the fonts did not print correctly, choose
Download as bit image and resubmit your print job. The
Download as bit image setting is often useful when printing
Adobe.
• Download as Bit Image: When this option is selected, the driver
downloads the font data as bitmap images. Documents with
complicated fonts, such as Korean or Chinese, print faster in this
setting.
• Print as Graphics: When this option is selected, the driver
downloads any fonts as graphics. When printing documents with
high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts, printing
performance (speed) may be enhanced in this setting.

- 160 -

Property

Description

 Font / Text
(continue)

Use Printer Fonts

 Graphic
Controller

This feature is available only when using the PostScript (PS) driver.

Toner Save

When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the printer uses the fonts that
are stored in its memory (resident fonts) to print your document,
rather than downloading the fonts that have been used in your
document. Because downloading fonts takes time, selecting this
option can speed up your printing time. When using Printer fonts,
the printer will try to match the fonts used in your document to
those stored in its memory. If, however, you use fonts in your
document that are very different from those resident in the printer,
your printed output will appear very different from what it looks
like on the screen.
NOTE: If you click Reset, settings in the options returns to
the default setting.
Negative Effect: allows users to print a negative of image by
reversing the values for black and white.
Selecting this option extends the life of your toner cartridge and
reduces your cost per page without a significant reduction in print
quality.
NOTE: You also change Toner Save in the Printer Settings
Utility.

- 161 -

Advanced Tab









Property

 Watermark

 Overlay

Description
You can create a background image of text to print on each page
of your document. See "Using Watermarks".
This feature is available only when using the PCL driver. Overlays
are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and
letterhead paper. See "Using Overlays".

- 162 -

Property

 Output Options

Description
Print Order
You can set the sequence for the pages to print. Select the print
order from the drop-down list.
• Normal: Your printer prints all pages from the first page to the
last page.
• Reverse All Pages: Your printer prints all pages from the last page
to the first page.
• Print Odd Pages: Your printer prints only the odd pages of the
document.
• Print Even Pages: Your printer prints only the even pages of the
document.
• Skip Blank Pages : This option allows you to specify not to print
blank pages in the original data.
• Manual Margin : This option allows you to specify binding
margin. Binding margin adjusts binding position. This option is
not available when you use the PS printer driver.
Advanced (This feature is available only when using the PostScript
(PS) driver.)
PostScript Options
• Output Option: specifies the output format for PostScript files.
– Optimize for Speed : Generally, you will use this option to print
your documents.
– Optimize for Portability : If you want to create a file that
conforms to the Adobe Document Structuring
Conventions(ADSC), select it. Each page of the document will
be a self-contained object. This is useful if you want to create a
PostScript file and print it on a different printer.
– Encapsulated PostScript(EPS) : If you want to include the file
as an image in another document that will be printed from a
different program, select it.
– Archive Format : If you want to create a PostScript file you can
use later, select it.
• PostScript Language: specifies which PostScript language level
to use. Some printers support multiple levels. It is usually best to
select the highest number available, since a higher language level
provides more features.

- 163 -

Property

 Output Options
(Continue)

 Security

Description
• PostScript PassThrough : specifies whether to print a PostScript
data created by the application that can create the PostScript
code for printing. The default is Auto. If selecting Auto or On,
some print options such as multiple page per side, watermark,
booklet, scaling (or output size) and poster may not work
correctly when printing from the application that can create the
PostScript code for printing. In that case, please change this
option to off.
– Auto: Driver determines automatically whether to print a
PostScript data created by the application, according to some
print options which user wants to use.
– On: Driver prints a PostScript data created by the application.
– Off: Driver doesn't print a PostScript data created by the
application.
NOTE: In some cases, to turn off PostScript PassThrough
may cause unexpected printout.
• Send PostScript Error Handler : specifies whether a PostScript
error handler message is sent. If you want the printer to print an
error page when an error occurs in the print job, check this
option.
You can set the job encryption.

- 164 -

Property

Job Accounting

Description
Job Accounting enables you to associate User and Account
identification information with each document you print.
• Admin Job Accounting Settings : You can enable this option and
configure job accounting settings to share job accounting
information with clients.
• Accounting Type : You can select an accounting type specified
by your system administrator.
• Accounting : You can enable print authentication by user ID and
password.
• ID Only : You can enable print authentication by user ID only.
– User permission : If a user click on this option, the printing job's
validity is determined based on the level of the user's access
and control.
– Group permission : If a user click on this option, the printing
job's validity is determined based on the level of group's access
and control that the user is member of.
• Confirm name/password when printing : You can confirm your
user ID or password during printing.
NOTE: This may not work in shared environment.

- 165 -

Dell Tab
Use the Dell tab to display the copyright notice and the version number of the driver. If you
have an Internet browser, you can connect to the Internet by clicking the Dell Website icon.

Using a Favorite Setting
The Favorite option, which is visible on each properties tab, allows you to save the current
properties settings for future use.
To save a Favorite item:
1

Change the settings on each tab, as needed.

Enter a name for the item in the Favorite input box.

Click Add (

To use a saved setting, select it from the Favorite drop-down list. The machine is now set to
print according to the setting you selected.
To delete a saved setting, select it from the Favorite drop-down list and click Delete (

You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting Printer Default from the
list.

- 166 -

Using Help
Click the option you want to know on the Printing Preferences window and press F1 on
your keyboard.
If you want to search information via a keyword, click the Dell tab in the Printing
Preferences window, and enter a keyword in the input line of the Help option.

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of the Paper
1

You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper. To print more than
one page per sheet, the pages will appear decreased in size and arranged on the sheet. You
can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.
1

When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.

From the Basic tab, choose Multiple Pages Per Side on the Type drop-down list.

- 167 -

Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet (2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) on the Pages
per Side drop-down list.

If necessary, select the page order on the Page Order drop-down list.

Right, Then
Down

Down, Then
Right

Left, Then
Down

Down, Then
Left

Check Print Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet. Print Page
Border is enabled only if the Pages per Side setting is set to a number greater than
one.
5

Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size, and type.

Click OK and print the document.

- 168 -

Change Percentage of Your Document

You can scale your print job on a page.
1

When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.

From the Paper tab.

Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.
You can also click the

button.

Select the paper source, size, and type.

Click OK and print the document.

- 169 -

Printing Posters

s 2x2
You can print a single-page document onto 4, 9, or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of
pasting the sheets together to form one poster-size document.
1

When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.

From the Basic tab, select Poster Printing in the Type drop-down list.

- 170 -

Select the page layout you want.
Specification of the page layout:
Poster 2x2: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 4 pages.
•
•
Poster 3x3: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 9 pages.
•
Poster 4x4: Document will be enlarged and be divided into 16 pages.
Select the Poster Overlap value. Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by
selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to make it easier to paste the
sheets together.
0.1 inches

0.1 inches

Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size, and type.

Click OK and print the document. You can complete the poster by reconstructing the
results.

- 171 -

Printing Booklets
8

This printer feature allows you to print your document on both sides of the paper and
arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a
booklet.
1

When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.

From the Basic tab, select Booklet Printing in the Type drop-down list.

NOTE: The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes. In order
to find out the available paper size for this feature, select the paper size in the
Size option on the Paper tab, then check if the Booklet Printing in a Layout
Options drop-down list on the Basic tab is activated.
3

Select the paper source, size, and type.

Click OK and print the document.

- 172 -

Printing on Both Sides of Paper

Your printer prints on both sides of the paper automatically.
Before printing, decide on which edge you will be binding your finished
document. The binding options are:
•

Long Edge, which is the conventional layout used in book binding.

•

Short Edge, which is the type often used with calendars.
2

3
2

3
5

Long Edge

Short Edge

NOTE: Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies, envelopes, or thick
paper. Damage to the printer and paper jamming might result.
NOTE: To use the double-sided printing, you can use only the following paper size:
A4, Letter, Legal and Folio.
1

When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.

From the Basic tab, select the paper orientation.

- 173 -

From the Double-Sided Printing section, select the desired binding option.

Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size and type.

Click OK and print the document.
Your printer prints on both sides of the paper automatically.

- 174 -

Using Watermarks

The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you
may want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally
across the first page or all pages of a document.
There are several predefined watermarks that come with your printer. They can be modified
or you can add new ones to the list.

Using an Existing Watermark
1

When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.

Click the Advanced tab and select a watermark on the Watermark drop-down list. It
appears in the preview image window.

Preview image

Click OK and start printing.

- 175 -

Creating a Watermark
1

When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.

Click the Advanced tab and click Edit... in the Watermark section. The Edit
Watermarks window appears.

Enter the text message you want to print in the Watermark Message box.
The message displays in the preview image window. The preview image is provided so
that you can see how the watermark will appear on the printed page.
When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark is printed on the first page
only.
NOTE: You can enter up to 256 letters.

Select the watermark options.
You can select the font name, style and size and gray scale level from the Font
Attributes section and set the angle of the watermark from the Message Angle
section.

Click Add to add a new watermark to the list.

When you finish creating, click OK and start printing.

To stop printing the watermark, select None on the Watermark drop-down list.

Editing a Watermark
1

When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.

Click the Advanced tab and click Edit... in the Watermark section. The Edit
Watermarks window appears.

Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change
the watermark message and options.

Click Update to save the changes.

Click OK.

Deleting a Watermark
1

When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.

Click the Advanced tab and click Edit... in the Watermark section. The Edit
Watermarks window appears.

Select the watermark you want to delete on the Current Watermarks list and click
Delete.

Click OK.

- 176 -

Using Overlays
What is an Overlay?
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive (HDD) as a special
file format that can be printed on any document. Overlays are often used to take the place
of preprinted forms and letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can
create an overlay containing the exact same information that is currently on your letterhead.
To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need to load preprinted
letterhead paper in the printer. You need only tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay
on your document.

Creating a New Page Overlay

WORLD BEST

To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image.
NOTE: The overlay document size must be the same as documents you will print
with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a watermark.
1

Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new page overlay.
Position the items exactly as you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay. If
needed, save the file for later use.

When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.

- 177 -

Click the Advanced tab and click Edit... in the Overlay section.

In the Edit Overlays window, click Create.

- 178 -

In the Save As window, type a name of up to eight characters in the File name box.
Select the destination path, if necessary. (The default is C:\FormOver).

Click Save. You can see the name in the Overlay List.

Click OK or Yes until you complete creating.
The file is not printed out; it is stored in your computer.

Using a Page Overlay
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your document. To print an
overlay with a document:
NOTE: The resolution of the overlay must be the same as the resolution of the
document that will print with the overlay.
1

Create or open the document you want to print.

When you change the print settings from your software application, access the printer
properties.

Click the Advanced tab.

Select the desired overlay from the Text drop-down list box.

- 179 -

If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Text drop-down list, select Edit...
from the list and click Load. Select the overlay file you want to use. If you have stored
the overlay file you want to use in an external source, you can also load the file when
you access the Load window.

After you select the file, click Open. The file is now shown in the Overlay List box and
is available for printing. Select the overlay from the Overlay List box.

If necessary, click Confirm Page Overlay When Printing. When this box is checked, a
message window appears each time you submit a document for printing, asking you
to confirm that you want to print an overlay on your document.
Answering Yes to the window means that the selected overlay will be printed with your
document. Answering No to the window cancels the use of the overlay page.
If this box is empty and an overlay has been selected, the overlay will be automatically
printed with your document.

Click OK or Yes until the printing starts.
The overlay is downloaded with your print job and printed on your document.

- 180 -

Deleting a Page Overlay
You can delete page overlays that are no longer used.
1

In the printer properties window, click the Advanced tab.

Click Edit... in the Overlay section.

Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box.

Click Delete.

When a confirming message window appears, click Yes.

Click OK until you exit the Print window.

- 181 -

Copying
Loading Paper for Copying
Selecting the Paper Tray
Preparing a Document
Loading an Original Document
Making Copies
Using Copy and Setting Options
Changing the Default Settings

- 182 -

Loading Paper for Copying
The instructions for loading print materials are the same whether you are printing, faxing, or
copying. For further details, see "Loading Paper" for loading paper in the paper tray and
"Using the MPF (Multi purpose feeder)" for loading paper in the multi purpose tray.

Selecting the Paper Tray
After loading the print media for copy output, you have to select the paper tray that you will
use for the copy job.
1

Press Copy from the home screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select Tray.

Select the paper tray you want.
You can select from Tray1, Tray2 (option) and MPF (multi purpose tray). If you do not
install the optional tray 2, the Tray2 (option) menu item will not appear on the display.

Press the home icon (

) to return to Home Screen.

Preparing a Document
You can use the document glass or the DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder) to load
an original document for copying, scanning and sending a fax. Using the DADF, you can
load up to 50 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb) documents for one job. Using the document glass,
you can load one sheet at a time.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, use the document glass instead of the DADF.
When you use the DADF:
•
•

Do not load documents smaller than 5.59 by 5.83 in. (142 by 148 mm) or larger than
8.5 by 14 in. (216 by 356 mm).
Do not attempt to feed the following types of documents:
–

Carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper

–

Coated paper

–

Onion skin or thin paper

–

Wrinkled or creased paper

–

Curled or rolled paper

–

Torn paper

–

Corner damage caused by excessive stapling/removal.

- 183 -

•

Remove all staples and paper clips before loading documents.

•

Ensure that any glue, ink or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before
loading documents.

•

Do not load documents containing different sizes or weights of paper.

•

Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies or documents having other unusual
characteristics.

Loading an Original Document
You can use the DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder) or the document glass to load
an original document. Using the DADF, you can load up to 50 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb)
paper at a time. Using the document glass, you can load one sheet at a time.
NOTE: Ensure that no document is in the DADF. If any document is detected in the
DADF, it has priority over the document on the document glass.
NOTE: To get the best scan quality, especially for color or gray scale images, use
the document glass instead of the DADF.
NOTE: If you use duplex copy features, see "Changing the Default Settings".
To load the document in the DADF:
1

Place the document(s) face up on the DADF with the top edge of the documents in
first

- 184 -

Adjust the document width guides to the correct document size. Ensure that the
bottom of the document stack matches the paper size marked on the document input
tray.

For detailed guidelines for preparing an original document, see "Preparing a
Document".
To load the document in the document glass:
1

Open the document cover.

- 185 -

Place the document face down on the document glass and align it with the
registration guide on the top left corner of the glass.

For detailed guidelines for preparing an original document, see "Preparing a
Document".
3

Close the document cover.
NOTE: If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the cover until
its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the cover. If the book or
magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with the cover open.
NOTE: Leaving the cover open while copying may affect the copy quality and
toner consumption.

- 186 -

Making Copies
NOTE: A computer connection is not required for copying.
NOTE: Contaminating on the document glass may cause black spots on the
printout. For best results, clean the document glass before use. See "Cleaning the
scanner".
1

Load the document(s) face up with the top edge in first into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".

Customize the copy settings including the number of copies, copy size, the darkness,
and the image quality by using the operator panel. See "Using Copy and Setting
Options".

Press Start ( ) on screen to begin copying.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press (
the copying will stop.

) on screen, and

Using Copy and Setting Options
The Copy menus on the operator panel let you customize all the basic copy options;
number of copies, duplex, zoom, darkness, original size, original type, tray, layout, collation,
stamp and watermark. Set the following options for the current copy job before pressing
Start ( ) to make copies.

Number of Copies
You can select the number of copies from 1 to 199.
1

Press Copy from the home screen.

Press the left/right arrows to find Number of Copies.

Press the -/+ buttons to select the number of copies you want.

Press Start ( ) on screen to begin copying.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press (
the copying will stop.

- 187 -

) on screen, and

Duplex
You can set the printer to print copies on both sides of paper.
1

Load the documents to be copied in the DADF.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".

Press Copy from the home screen

Press the left/right arrows to select Duplex.

Select the binding option you want.
•
•
•

1->1 side: Prints in normal mode.
1->2 Side Long Edge: Prints pages to be read like a book.
1->2 Side Short Edge: Prints pages to be read by flipping through it like a note
pad.
•
2->1 Side Long Edge: Scans both sides of the originals and prints each of them on
a separate sheet.
•
2->1 Side Short Edge: Scans both sides of the originals and prints each one on a
separate sheet, but the information on the back side of the printout is rotate 180°.
2->2 Side Long Edge: Scans both sides of the original and prints on both sides of
•
the paper. This function produces exactly the same print out from the originals.
Press Start ( ) on screen to begin copying.

Zoom
You can reduce or enlarge the size of a copied image, from 25 percent to 400 percent,
when you copy original documents from the document glass or the DADF.
NOTE: When you make a reduced copy, black lines may appear at the bottom of
your copy.
To select from the predefined copy sizes:
1

Press Copy from the home screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select Zoom.

Press the left/right arrows to select the zoom rate you want.

You can select from Auto Fit, 25~400%.
NOTE: If a document is detected in the DADF, the Auto Fit does not work.

Darkness
Adjust the darkness to make the copy lighter or darker than the original.
1

Press Copy from the home screen

Press the left/right arrows to find Darkness.

Press the -/+ buttons to select level(-5 ~ 5) you want.

Press Start ( ) on screen to begin copying.

- 188 -

NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press (
the copying will stop.

) on screen, and

Original Size
You can set the size of a copied image, when you copy original documents from the
documents glass or the DADF.
1

Press Copy from the home screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select Original Size.

select the original size you want.

Original Type
The original type setting is used to improve the image quality by selecting the document
type for the current copy job.
1

Press Copy from the home screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select Original Type. .

Select the image quality mode you want.
•
•
•

Text: Use for documents with fine details, such as fine text.
Text & Photo: Use for documents with both text and photo/gray tones.
Photo: Use for documents with photo or gray tones.

Tray
You can select the paper tray that you will use for the copy job.
1

Press Copy from the home screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select Tray.

Press the home icon (

) to return to Home Screen.

Layout
Adjusts the layout format such as 2-Up, 4-Up, ID, Booklet, Clone, Poster, Book.

- 189 -

2-Up or 4-Up copying (N-up)
1

2
2-up copying
(Portrait)

2-up copying
(Landscape)

4-up copying
(Portrait)

4-up copying
(Landscape)

The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 pages onto one sheet
of paper. This special copy mode can be applied when you load a document using only the
DADF.
NOTE: You cannot adjust the copy size using the Zoom menu for making a 2 Up or
4 Up copy.
1

Press Copy

Layout

2-Up or 4-Up from the home screen.

OR
Press Multiple-Up Copy
3

Multiple-Up

2-Up or 4-Up from the home screen.

Select 2-Up or 4-Up.
•
2-Up: Copies two separate originals onto one page.
4-Up: Copies four separate originals onto one page.
•
Press the left/right arrows to select Portrait or Landscape according to the original
paper’s orientation.

If necessary, customize the copy settings including number of copies, darkness,
original size, and original type. See "Using Copy and Setting Options".

Press

Press Start ( ) on screen to begin copying.

to go to the upper menu.

NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press (
the copying will stop.

) on screen, and

Booklet Copying
The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper, which are then folded
to produce a booklet with all the pages in the correct sequence.
The machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each image to fit on the
selected paper.

- 190 -

To make the booklet copying:
1

Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".

Press Copy

Press the appropriate option.

Layout

Booklet from the home screen.

•
•
•
•

Off: Disables this feature.
1 Sided Original: Copies from one side of the original to one page of a booklet.
2 Sided Original Book: Copies each side of an original to one page of a booklet.
2 Sided Original Calendar: Copies each side of an original to one page of a
booklet. The second side of each original is rotated 180 degrees so the text will be
upright in the booklet.
Press Start ( ) from the screen.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press (
the copying will stop.

) on screen, and

ID Copying

When you copy using this feature, the printer prints one side on the upper half of the paper
and the other side on the lower half without reducing the original. This feature is helpful for
copying a small-sized document, such as a name card.
If the original document is larger than the printable area, some portions may not be printed.
This special copy mode can be applied when you load a document using only the
document glass. If a document is detected in the DADF, the ID copying feature does not
work.
NOTE: You cannot adjust the copy size using the Zoom menu for ID copying.
To make the ID copying:
1

Press Copy

Layout

ID from the home screen.

OR
Press All Applicatons (

)

ID from the home screen.

Place the front side of an original facing down on the document glass where arrows
indicate as shown, and close the scanner lid.

Press the Next (

If necessary, customize the copy settings including number of copies, darkness,
original type, and original size by pressing Options. See "Using Copy and Setting
Options".

) button.

- 191 -

Press Start ( ) from the screen.

Turn the original over and place it on the document glass, where arrows indicate as
shown then, close the scanner lid.

Press Start ( ) from the screen.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press (
the copying will stop.

) on screen, and

Clone Copying

This special copy mode can be applied when you load a document using only the
document glass. If a document is detected on the DADF, the Clone copying feature does
not work.
NOTE: You cannot adjust the copy size using the Zoom menu while making a clone
copy.
To make the Clone copying:
1

Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".

Press Copy from the home screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select Layout

If necessary, customize the copy settings including number of copies, darkness,
original type, and original size by pressing Options. See "Using Copy and Setting
Options"..

Press Start ( ) on screen to begin copying.

Clone.

NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press (
the copying will stop.

- 192 -

) on screen, and

Poster Copying

This special copy mode can be applied when you load a document using only the document
glass. If a document is detected in the DADF, the Poster copying feature does not work.
NOTE: You cannot adjust the copy size using the Zoom menu button for making a
poster.
To make the Poster copying:
1

Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".

Press Copy from the home screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select Layout

Press Start ( ) on screen to begin copying.

Poster.

NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press (
the copying will stop.

) on screen, and

Your original document is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is scanned and printed
one by one in the following order:

- 193 -

Book Copying

Use this feature to copy a book. If the book is too thick, lift the scanner lid until its hinges are
engaged by the stopper and then close the scanner lid. If the book or magazine is thicker
than 30 mm (1.18 inches), start copying with the scanner lid open.
This special copy mode can be applied when you load a document using only the
document glass. If a document is detected in the DADF, the book copying feature does not
work.
1

Place a single document face down on the glass as below :

Press Copy

Layout

Book from the home screen.

OR
Press All Applicatons (

)

Book Copy from the home screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select you want.

•
Both: Prints both facing pages of the book.
•
Left: Prints left page of the book.
•
Right: Prints right page of the book.
Press Start ( ) on screen to begin copying.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press (
the copying will stop.

- 194 -

) on screen, and

Collation
Set the machine to sort the copy job. For example, if you make 2 copies of a 3 page original,
one complete 3 page document will print followed by a second complete document.
To make the Collate copying:
NOTE: The menu items of Collate Copy, 2-Up, and 4-Up may be available only
when you loaded the document in the DADF.
1

Press Copy from the home screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select Collation.

Select you want.
•
•

On : Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals.

•

Off : Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages.

NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press (
the copying will stop.

) on screen, and

Stamp
You can manage document using prints the date and time, page number or user ID on
printouts.
1

Press Copy from the home screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select Stamp.
OR
Press My Settings

Machine Setup

Stamp.

In case of this method, inactive in Copy menu and do not apply to fax pritouts.

- 195 -

Select the options you want.
•
•
•

Item : Prints the time and date, IP address, page number, device information,
comment, or user ID, to the copy output.
Opacity : You can select the transparent or opaque.
Position : Sets the position.

Watermark
The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document. For example, you
use it when you want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed
diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document.
1

Press Copy from the home screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select Watermark.

Select options you want.
•
•
•
•
•

Message : Select the text message.
Text Size : Select the text message size.
Position : Select the text message position.
Darkness : Select the text darkness.
1st Page Only : Select to print the option only the first page.

Eco Copying
You can cut toner consumption and paper usage.
To make the Eco copying:
1

Press Eco Copy from the home screen.
OR
Press All Applicatons (

3
4

)

Eco Copy from the home screen.

If necessary, customize the copy settings. See "Using Copy and Setting Options"
Press Start ( ) on screen to begin copying.
NOTE: You can cancel the copy job at any time. Press (
the copying will stop.

- 196 -

) on screen, and

Changing the Default Settings
The copy options, including darkness, image quality, copy size, and the number of copies,
can be set to the most frequently used modes. When you copy a document, the default
settings are used unless they are changed by using the operator panel.
To create your own default settings:
1

Press My Settings
Machine Setup
Common from the home screen.

Select the option you want.

Press the home icon (

Default Setting

) to return to Home Screen.

- 197 -

Copy Default

Scanning
Scanning Overview
Scan to Email
Scan to PC/Network PC
Scan to Network Folder/FTP Server
Scan to Fax Server
Scan to WSD
Email & Fax
Scanning from image editing program
Scanning using the WIA driver

- 198 -

Scanning Overview
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be
stored on your computer. Then you can fax or email the files, upload them to your website,
or use them to create projects that you can print.
The scanning methods are scan to email, scan to computer (local and network), and scan to
USB.
Use your Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP or Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP to convert pictures and
text into editable images on your computer. After you install the software from the Drivers
and Documentation CD, you can scanning images using Dell Scan Manager, which enables
you to scan a document on your printer as a JPEG, TIFF or PDF and save it to a
network-connected computer. Or, you can send the scanned image as an Email
attachment directly from the printer.
NOTE: If you prefer to use another application, such as Adobe PhotoShop, you
must assign the application to the printer by selecting it from the list of available
applications.

- 199 -

Scan to Email
Setting up an email account
1

Access the Embedded Web Service. See "Required web browser"

Select Settings

Network Settings

Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP).

Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.

Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require authentication.

Enter the SMTP server Log in name and password.

Press Apply.
NOTE: If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3 before SMTP, put a
check mark of SMTP Requires POP Before SMTP Authentication.
NOTE: Enter the IP address and port number.

Scanning and sending an email
1

Press Scan to Email from the home screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select Send Email.

Enter the recipient’s email address using Direct Input or Address (
screen.

If necessary, customize the scan settings including scan resolution, scan color, scan
)
format, pdf encryption, duplex, original size and original type by using Setting(
from the screen.

- 200 -

) from the

Press Start ( ) from the screen.
The printer begins scanning and then sends the Email.

Scan to PC/Network PC
1

Load the document(s) face up with top edge in first into the DADF (Duplex Automatic
Document Feeder).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".

Press Scan to PC or Scan to Network PC from the home screen.
OR
Press All Applicatons (
screen.

)

Scan to PC or Scan to Network PC from the home

Press the up/down arrows until the application program you want.
If you select Scan to Network PC, select your computer ID and password using the
pop-up keyboard.
NOTE: ID is the same ID/Password as the registered scan ID for Dell Printer
Switch to advanced mode → Scan to PC Settings.
Manager →

The selected application window opens. Adjust the scan settings and scan. For details,
please refer to the user’s guide of the application.

Press Start ( ) from the screen.
The printer begins scanning and then sends the scanned data to Dell Printer Manager.
NOTE: If you selected My Document scanned image is saved in computer's My
Document → My Pictures → Dell folder.

- 201 -

NOTE: You can use Twain driver to scan quickly in Dell Scan Manager
program.

Scan to Network Folder/FTP Server
Setting up an Network Folder/FTP server
1

Access the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool. See "Embedded Web Service"

Select Address Book

Check the box next to Add FTP or Add Network Folder.

Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.

Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

Check the box next to Anonymous, then the server permits the access of
unauthorized people.

Enter the Log in name and password.

Enter the domain name if your server is joined to the certain domain, otherwise just
enter your computer name which is registered to the Network Folder.

Enter the path for saving the scanned image.

Individual

Add.

•

The folder to save the scanned image must be on the root.

•

The folder properties need to be setup as a share.

•

Your user name should have the rights to read and write the folder.

Press Apply.

- 202 -

Scanning and sending to Network Folder/FTP server
1

Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.

Press All Applicatons (
screen.

)

Scan to FTP or Scan to Network Folder from the home

Select a server and scan format you want.

The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the specified
server.

- 203 -

Scan to Fax Server
Fax server will deliver the fax/Email data to send out the job. The Email is automatically
processed by fax server and sent to the given recipient.
First, the printer sends the scanned data to the fax server. Then, the fax server uses PSTN to
send a fax/Email data to recipient.
To use fax server features as scan to Email, you first need to configure the network settings.
See "Embedded Web Service" for network parameters.
1

Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.

Press All Applicatons (

)

Scan to Fax Server from the home screen.

Enter the remote fax phone number using Direct Input or Fax List.

Select a server and scan format you want.

Press Start ( ) from the screen.
The printer begins scanning and then sends the email.

- 204 -

Scan to WSD
Scans the originals and saves the scanned data on a connected computer if the computer
supports the WSD (Web Service for Device) feature. To use the WSD feature, you need to
install the WSD printer driver on your computer. For Windows 7, you can install the WSD
Devices and Printers
Add a printer. Click Add a network
driver by Control Panel
printer from the wizard.
NOTE: The WSD feature works only with Windows Vista® or later version that are
the WSD-compliant computer.
NOTE: The following installation steps are based on Windows 7 computer.

Installing a WSD Printer Driver
NOTE: For install WSD printer, printer driver should be installed.
1

Select Start

Click Add a network, wireless or Bluetooth printer from the wizard.

In the printers list, select the one you want to use, and then click Next.

Control Panel

Devices and Printers

Add a printer.

NOTE: The IP address for WSD printer is http://IP address/ws/ (example: http://
111.111.111.111/ws/).
NOTE: If no WSD printer is displayed in the list, click The printer that I want
isn’t listed
Add a printer using a TCP/IP address or hostname and select
Web Services Device from Device type. Then enter the printer's IP address.
4

Follow the instructions in the installation window.

Scanning using the WSD feature
1

Make sure that your machine is connected to a network.

Press Scan to WSD from the home screen.
OR
Press All Applicatons (

)

Scan to WSD from the home screen.

Select your computer name from Destination List.

Press Start ( ) from the screen.
The printer begins scan and save your scanned image to the WSD server.

- 205 -

Email & Fax
Scans the originals and send the scanned data to Email and Fax at once.
1

Press Email & Fax from the home screen.
OR
Press All Applicatons (

)

Email & Fax from the home screen.

Enter the recipient’s Email address and fax phone number using Direct Input or
Address (
) from the screen.

If necessary, customize the scan settings including scan resolution, scan color, scan
format, pdf encryption, duplex, original size ,original type and etc by using
Setting(
) from the screen.

Press Start ( ) from the screen.
The printer begins scanning and then sends Email and fax.

- 206 -

Scanning from image editing program
You can scan and import documents in the image editing software such as Adobe
Photoshop, if the software is TWAIN-compliant. Follow the steps below to scan with
TWAIN-compliant software:
1

Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.

Open an application, such as Adobe Photoshop.

Click File

Set the scan options.

Scan and save your scanned image.

Import, and select the scanner device.

- 207 -

Scanning using the WIA driver
Your machine supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver for scanning images.
WIA is one of the standard components provided by Microsoft Windows 7 and works with
digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan
and easily adjust images without using additional software:
NOTE: The WIA driver works only on Windows OS with a USB port.
1

Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.

Click Start

Right-click on device icon in Printers and Faxes

New Scan application appears.

Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to see how your preferences will
affect the picture.

Scan and save your scanned image.

Control Panel

Devices and Printers.

- 208 -

Start Scan.

Networking
Network setup (Administrator only)
Useful network programs
Setting IP address
Installing driver over the network
IPv6 configuration
Wireless network setup (Dell B2375dfw only)
Using the WPS button (Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only)
Setup using Windows (Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only)
Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off (Dell B2375dfw Mono
MFP only)
Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing
Troubleshooting for wireless network
AirPrint
Google Cloud Print™

- 209 -

Network setup (Administrator only)
NOTE: You can also use this feature from the Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool.
Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of
your machine. When Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool opens, click Settings
Network Settings.
•

Press My Settings

Machine Setup

Network Setup from the home screen.

Option

Description

Ethernet Speed

Configure the network transmission speed.

TCP/IP (IPv4)

Selects the appropriate protocol and configure parameters to use
the network environment.
NOTE: There are lots of parameters to be set. If you are not
sure, leave as is, or consult the network administrator.

TCP/IP (IPv6)

Selects this option to use the network environment through IPv6.

802.1x

You can selects the user authentication for network
communication. For detailed information consult the network
administrator.

Ethernet Active

You can set whether to use Ethernet on or off.
NOTE: Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.

Wi-Fi

Selects this option to use the wireless network.

Clear Settings

Reverts the network settings to the default values.
NOTE: Turn the power off and on after you change this
option.

- 210 -

Useful network programs
There are several programs available to setup the network settings easily in a network
environment. For the network administrator especially, managing several machines on the
network is possible.
NOTE: Before using the programs below, set the IP address first.

Dell Printer Configuration Web Tool
The web server embedded on your network machine allows you to do the following tasks.
•

Check the supplies information and status.

•

Customize machine settings.

•

Set the email notification option. When you set this option, the machine status (toner
cartridge shortage or machine error) will be sent to a certain person's email
automatically.

•

Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to connect to various
network environments.

SetIP wired network setup
This utility program allows you to select a network interface and manually configure the IP
addresses for use with the TCP/IP protocol.
NOTE: TCP/IPv6 is not supported by this program.

Printing a network configuration report
You can print Network Configuration Report from the machine’s control panel that will
show the current machine’s network settings. This will help you to set up a network.
•

The machine has the display screen: Press My Settings
Network Settings from the home screen.

Machine Setup

Reports

Using this Network Configuration Report, you can find your machine’s MAC address and IP
address.
For example:
•

MAC Address: 00:15:99:41:A2:78

•

IP Address: 169.254.192.192

- 211 -

Printing Across a Network
Whether the printer is locally connected or network-connected, you need to install the Dell
B2375dfw Mono MFP or Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP software on each computer that prints
documents using the printer.

Setting IP address
First, you have to set up an IP address for network printing and managements. In most cases
a new IP address will be automatically assigned by a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol) server located on the network.

IPv4 configuration using SetIP
Before using the SetIP program, disable the computer firewall from Control Panel
Security Center
Windows Firewall.
1

Download the software from the Dell website then unpack and install it:
(http://www.dell.com
find your product
Support or Downloads).

Follow the instructions in the installation window.

Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.

Turn on the machine.

From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs
B2375dfw Mono MFP or Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP

Click the

Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window. In a corporate
intranet, you may need to have this information assigned by a network manager
before proceeding.

Dell Printers
SetIP.

Dell

icon in the SetIP window to open the TCP/IP configuration window.

NOTE: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network Configuration
Report. See "Printing a network configuration report". and enter it without the
colons. For example, 00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
8

Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the Network
Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are correct.

- 212 -

Installing driver over the network
Configuring Network Parameters on the Operator Panel
Item

Requirements

Network Interface

• Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-TX Wired Lan
• 802.11b/g/n Wireless LAN (Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only)

Network Operating
System

• Windows® XP, Windows Server® 2003, Windows Vista®,
Windows® 7, Windows® 8, Windows Server® 2008 R2
• Various Linux OS
• Mac OS X 10.5 - 10.8
• UNIX OS

Network Protocols

•
•
•
•

TCP/IPv4
DHCP, BOOTP
DNS, WINS, Bonjour, SLP, UPnP
Standard TCP/IP Printing (RAW), LPR, IPP, WSD, AirPrint,
Google Cloud Print
• SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec
• TCP/IPv6 (DHCP, DNS, RAW, LPR, SNMPv 1/2/3, HTTP, IPSec)

Wireless security

• Authentication: Open System, Shared Key
• Encryption: WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES
• WPA Security : WPA-Enterprise/ Personal,
WPA2-Enterprise/Personal

(Dell B2375dfw Mono
MFP only)
1

Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.

Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.
The software CD should automatically run and an installation window will appear.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start
Accessories
Run.

All Programs

X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CDROM drive and
click OK.
–

- 213 -

Select Setup... in New Printer area.

Select Ethernet.

- 214 -

Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on. Also, your
machine’s IP address should have been set.
Click Next.

The searched machines will be shown on the screen. Select the one you wish to use
and click Next.
NOTE: If you cannot find your machine in network, turn off the firewall and
click Update. For Windows operating system, Start
Control Panel and start
windows firewall, and set this option unactivated. For other operating system,
refer to its on-line guide.

Follow the instructions in the installation window.

From the Windows 8 Start Screen
•

Dell Printer Experience app can only be used in the Start screen when V4 driver is
installed. The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if your
computer is connected to the Internet. If not, you can manually download the V4
driver from Dell website, www.dell.com
find your product
Support or
downloads.

•

You can download Dell Printer Experience app from the Windows Store. You need
have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store.
a

From Charms, select Search.

Click Store.

Search and click Dell Printer Experience.

Click Install.

- 215 -

•

If you install the driver using the supplied software CD, V4 driver is not installed. If you
want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen, you can download from the Dell
website, www.dell.com
find your product
Support or downloads.

•

If you want to install Dell’s printer management tools, you need to install them using
the supplied software CD.

Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on. Also, your
machine’s IP address should have been set. See "Setting IP address".

From Charms, select Settings

Click Add a device.

Change PC settings

Devices.

Discovered machines will be shown on the screen.
4

Click the model name or host name you wish to use.
NOTE: You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine’s
control panel that will show the current machine’s host name.

The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update.
If you selected EtheTalk.

IPv6 configuration
CAUTION: IPv6 is supported properly only in Windows Vista or higher.
NOTE: If the IPv6 network seems to not be working, set all the network setting to
the factory defaults and try again using Clear Setting.
In the IPv6 network environment, follow the next procedure to use the IPv6 address.

From the control panel
1

Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.

Turn on the machine.

Print a Network Configuration Report that will check IPv6 addresses. See "Printing a
network configuration report".

Select Start

Control Panel

Printers and Faxes.

Click Add a printer in the left pane of the Printers and Faxes windows.

Click Add a local printer in the Add printer windows.

The Add Printer Wizard window appears. Follow the instructions in the window.
NOTE: If the machine does not work in the network environment, activate
IPv6. Refer to the next section followed by.

- 216 -

Activating IPv6
1

Connect your machine to the network with a network cable.

Press My Settings

Press the left/right arrows to select Select On and press

Turn the machine off and turn it on again.

Reinstall your printer driver.

Machine Setup

Network Setup

TCP/IP (IPv6)
.

Setting IPv6 addresses
The machine supports the following IPv6 addresses for network printing and managements.
•

Link-local Address: Self-configured local IPv6 address (Address starts with FE80).

•

Stateless Address: Automatically configured IPv6 address by a network router.

•

Stateful Address: IPv6 address configured by a DHCPv6 server.

•

Manual Address: Manually configured IPv6 address by a user.

DHCPv6 address configuration (Stateful)
If you have a DHCPv6 server on your network, you can set one of the following options for
default dynamic host configuration.
1

Press My Settings

Press DHCPv6 Config.

Press the left/right arrows to select Select what you want.
•
•
•

Machine Setup

Network Setup

TCP/IP (IPv6)

Always Use: Always use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.
Never Use : Never use DHCPv6 regardless of router request.
Router: Use DHCPv6 only when requested by a router.

- 217 -

Wireless network setup (Dell B2375dfw only)
NOTE: Make sure your machine supports wireless networking. Wireless networking
may not be available depending on the model. (Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only)

Getting started
Understanding your network type
Typically, you can only have one connection between your computer and the machine at a
time.

Infrastructure mode
This is an environment generally used for homes and SOHOs
(Small Office/ Home Office). This mode uses an access point to
communicate with the wireless machine.

Ad hoc mode
This mode does not use an access point. The wireless computer
and wireless machine communicate directly.

Wireless network name and network key
Wireless networks require higher security, so when an access point is first set up, a network
name (SSID), the type of security used, and a Network Key are created for the network. Ask
your network administrator about this information before proceeding with the machine
installation.

- 218 -

Introducing wireless set up methods
You can set wireless settings either from the machine or the computer. Choose the setting
method from the below table.
NOTE: Some wireless network installation types may not be available depending on
the model or country.
Set up method
From the machine’s
control panel
From the computer

Connecting method

Description & Reference

Using the WPS
(recommended)

•

See "Using the WPS button (Dell
B2375dfw Mono MFP only)".

Access point via USB
cable
(recommended)

•

Windows user, See "Access point
via USB cable in Windows".

•

Mac user, See "Access point via
USB cable in Mac".

Ad hoc via USB cable

•

Windows user, See "Ad hoc via
USB cable in Windows".

•

Mac user, See "Ad hoc via USB
cable in Mac".

NOTE: If problems occur during wireless set up or driver installation, refer to the
troubleshooting chapter. See "Troubleshooting for wireless network"

- 219 -

Using the WPS button (Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only)
If your machine and an access point (or wireless router) support Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
(WPS), you can easily configure the wireless network settings by pressing the
(WPS)
button on the control panel without a computer.
•

If you want to use the wireless network using the infrastructure mode, make
sure that the network cable is disconnected from the machine. Using the WPS
button or entering the PIN from the computer to connect to the access point
(or wireless router) varies depending on the access point (or wireless router)
you are using. Refer to the user's guide of the access point (or wireless router)
you are using.

•

When using the WPS button to set the wireless network, security settings may
change. To prevent this, lock the WPS option for the current wireless security
settings. The option name may differ depending on the access point (or
wireless router) you are using.

•
–

WPS button has two functions.
Press and hold the
(WPS) button on the control panel for more than 2 seconds,
then wait for up to two minutes until you press the WPS (PBC) button on the
access point (or wireless router).

–

If you Press and hold the
(WPS) button on the control panel for less than 2
seconds, below manus are shown.
•

Wi-Fi : You can turn the Wi-Fi on/off.

•

Wi-Fi Direct : You can turn the Wi-Fi Direct on/off.

•

WPS (Connect via PBC) : Connect your machine to a wireless network using
the PBC method.

•

WPS (Connect via PIN) : Connect your machine to a wireless network using
the PIN method.

Items to prepare
•

Check if the access point (or wireless router) supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ (WPS).

•

Networked computer (PIN mode only)

Choosing your type
There are two methods available to connect your machine to a wireless network using the
(WPS) button on the control panel.
The Push Button Configuration (PBC) method allows you to connect your machine to a
wireless network by pressing both the (WPS) button on the control panel of your machine
and the
(WPS) button on a Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ WPS-enabled access point (or
wireless router) respectively.

- 220 -

The Personal Identification Number (PIN) method helps you connect your machine to a
wireless network by entering the supplied PIN information on a Wi-Fi Protected Setup™
WPS-enabled access point (or wireless router).

Connecting in PBC mode
1

Press and hold the

(WPS) button on the control panel for more than 2 seconds.

The machine starts waiting for up to two minutes until you press the WPS (PBC) button
on the access point (or wireless router).
OR
Press
(WPS) button (on the control panel)
screen).

Connect via PBC (from the home

OR
Press My Settings
Machine Setup
Network Setup
Connect via PBC from the home screen.
2

Wi-Fi

WPS

Press the WPS (PBC) button on the access point (or wireless router).
a

The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to the access
point (or wireless router).

When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the WPS
LED light stays on.

Connecting in PIN mode
1

If you wnat to konw PIN number, printing network configuration report. See "Printing a
network configuration report"

Press
(WPS) button (on the control panel) less than 2 seconds
(from the home screen).

Connect via PIN

OR
Press My Settings
Machine Setup
Network Setup
Connect via PIN from the home screen.

Wi-Fi

WPS

The machine starts connecting to the access point (or wireless router).
3

You need to enter the eight-digit PIN within two minutes on the computer that is
connected to the access point (or wireless router).
The LED blinks fast for up to two minutes until you enter the eight-digit PIN.
The WPS LED blinks in the order below:
a

The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine is connecting to the access
point (or wireless router).

When the machine is successfully connected to the wireless network, the WPS
LED light stays on.

- 221 -

Re-connecting to a network
When the wireless function is on, the machine automatically tries to re-connect to the
access point (or wireless router) with the previously used wireless connection settings and
address. If not successful after two minutes, the wireless connection will be stopped and
Wi-Fi setting is turned off.
NOTE: In the following cases, the machine automatically re-connects to the
wireless network:
•

The machine is turned off and on again.

•

The access point (or wireless router) is turned off and on again.

•

The light blinks fast on the WPS LED. The machine tries connecting to the access
point (or wireless router).

Disconnecting from a network
There are two methods available to disconnect the wireless network.
a

Press
(WPS) button (on the control panel) less than 2 seconds
Activate (from the home screen)
Off .

Press My Settings
Machine Setup
Network Setup
Off from the home screen.
Activate

Wi-Fi

Using the menu button
Before starting, you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless network
and the Network Password if it is encrypted. This information was set when the access point
(or wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your wireless environment,
please ask the person who set up your network.
NOTE: After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application. See "Installing driver over the network".
1

Press My Settings
Machine Setup
Network Setup
On and select Wi-Fi Settings from the home screen .

select the setup method you want.
•
•

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi Activate

Search List (recommended): In this mode, the setup is automatic. The machine
will display a list of available networks to choose. From after a network is chosen
then printer will prompt for the corresponding security key.
Custom: In this mode, users can give or manually edit their own SSID , or choose
the security option in detail.

Using other menu buttons
•

Wi-Fi : You can turn the Wi-Fi on/off.

•

Wi-Fi Direct : You can turn the Wi-Fi Direct on/off.

•

WPS :You can select Connecting method.

•

Wi-Fi Signal : You can check the Wi-Fi status.

•

Wi-Fi Default : Sets default.

- 222 -

Setup using Windows (Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP only)
Dell Printer Easy Wi-Fi Install
Before Using Dell Printer Easy Wi-Fi Install, please ensure that OS of your computer should
be Windows 7 and above.
•

Items to prepare
–

Access point

–

Network-connected computer

–

Software CD that was provided with your machine

Turn on your computer, access point and machine.

Connect your computer to the wireless network.

Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.
The software CD should automatically run and an installation window will appear.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start
Accessories
Run.

All programs

X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD/DVD drive and
click OK .
•
For Windows 8,
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select Search
Apps and
search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter that represents your
CD/DVD drive and click OK .
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window appears, click the
window and select Run Setup.exe.

- 223 -

Click New Printer .

Choose Wireless.

- 224 -

The software searches for printers.

Set your printer name and click Next.

- 225 -

Setup installing printer software.

After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If
you want to print a test page, click Print a test page.
Otherwise, just click Next and go to step 10.

Click Finish.

- 226 -

Access point via USB cable in Windows
•

Items to prepare
–

Access point

–

Network-connected computer

–

Software CD that was provided with your machine

–

The machine installed with a wireless network interface

–

USB cable

Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.

Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.
NOTE: If the “Found New Hardware Wizard” appears during the installation
procedure, click Cancel to close the window.

All programs

X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD/DVD drive and
click OK .
•
For Windows 8,
Apps and
If the installation window does not appear, from Charms, select Search
search for Run. Type in X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter that represents your
CD/DVD drive and click OK .
If “Tap to choose what happens with this disc.” pop-up window appears, click the
window and select Run Setup.exe.

- 227 -

Select New Printer .

Choose Wireless.

- 228 -

Click Next.

The software searches the wireless network.
NOTE: If the search has failed, you may check if the USB cable is properly
connected between the computer and machine, and follow the instructions
on the window.

After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select the name
(SSID) of the access point you are using and click Next.
NOTE: If you cannot find the network name you want to choose, or if you
want to set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced Setting.
–

Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of access point you want (SSID
is case-sensitive).

–

Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.

–

Authentication: Select an authentication type.
Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be
used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can
access the network.
WPA Personal or WPA2 Personal: Select this option to authenticate the print
server based on WPA Pre-Shared Key. This uses a shared secret key (generally
called Pre- Shared Key pass phrase) which is manually configured on the access
point and each of its clients.

–

Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP AES).

–

Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.

- 229 -

–

Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value.

–

WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key
Index.
NOTE: The wireless network security window appears when the access point
has security settings.
The wireless network security window appears. The window may differ
according to its security mode: WEP, or WPA.

–

WEP
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and enter the WEP
security key. Click Next.
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized
access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet
exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key.

–

WPA
Enter the WPA shared key and click Next.
WPA authorizes and identifies users based on a secret key that changes
automatically at regular intervals. WPA also uses TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity
Protocol) and AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) for data encryption.

The window shows the wireless network settings and checks if the settings are
correct. Click Next.
•

For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the
window. If it shows Static, click Change TCP/IP to change the assignment
method to DHCP.

•

For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the
window. If it shows DHCP, click Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and
other network configuration values for the machine. Before entering the IP
address for the machine, you must know the computer’s network configuration
information. If the computer is set to DHCP, you must contact the network
administrator to get the static IP address.
For example:
If the computer’s network information is as shown below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Then, the machine’s network information should be as follows:
- IP address: 169.254.133.43
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)

- 230 -

- Gateway: 169.254.133.1
10

When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB cable
between the computer and machine. Click Next.
NOTE: If the Change PC Network Setting window appears, follow the steps in
the window.
Click Next if you are finished with the computer’s wireless network settings.
If you set the computer’s wireless network on DHCP, it will take several minutes to
receive the IP address.

The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. To print from a Wi-Fi Direct
supported mobile device, set the Wi-Fi Direct Option.
NOTE: Wi-Fi Direct Option:
–

Wi-Fi Direct option appears on the screen only if your printer supports this feature.

–

Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Dell Printer Manager

–

Network Name(SSID): The default Network Name is the model name and the
maximum length is 22 characters (not including "Direct-xx-").

–

Network Key is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.

After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test page appears. If
you want to print a test page, click Print a test page.

Click Finish.

- 231 -

Ad hoc via USB cable in Windows
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine wirelessly to
your computer by setting up an ad-hoc wireless network by following the simple steps
below.
•

Items to prepare
–

Network-connected computer

–

Software CD that was provided with your machine

–

The machine installed with a wireless network interface

–

USB cable

Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.

Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.

All programs

X:\Setup.exe replacing “X” with the letter, which represents your CD/DVD drive and
click OK .
4

Select New Printer .

- 232 -

Select Wireless.

The software searches the wireless network.
NOTE: If the software has failed to search the network, check if the USB cable
is connected properly between the computer and machine, and follow the
instruction in the window.

After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your machine has
searched appears.
If you want to use the Dell default ad hoc setting, select the last wireless network on
the list, Network Name(SSID) is Dell_device and Dell_Signal is Printer Self Network.
Then, click Next.
If you want to use other ad hoc settings, select another wireless network from the list.
NOTE: If you want to change ad hoc settings click the Advanced Setting
button.
–

Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of access point you want (SSID
is case-sensitive).

–

Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.

–

Channel: Select the channel. (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).

–

- 233 -

–

Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).

–

Network Key: Enter the encryption network key value.

–

Confirm Network Key: Confirm the encryption network key value.

WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key
Index.
The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network has security
setting.
The wireless network security window appears. Select Open System or Shared Key
for the authentication and click Next.
–

WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a security protocol preventing unauthorized
access to your wireless network. WEP encrypts the data portion of each packet
exchanged on a wireless network using a 64-bit or 128-bit WEP encryption key.

The window showing the wireless network setting appears. Check the settings and
click Next.
NOTE: Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the
wireless network setting should also be Static.
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use the Static wireless network
setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address.
–

For the DHCP method: If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if
DHCP is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows
Static, click Change TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP
address automatically (DHCP) .

–

For the Static method: If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if
Static is shown in the Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows
DHCP, click Change TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network
configuration values for the machine.
For example:
If the computer’s network information is as shown below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Then, the machine’s network information should be as follows:
- IP address: 169.254.133.43
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1

- 234 -

The Wireless Network Setting Complete window appears. To print from a Wi-Fi Direct
supported mobile device, set the Wi-Fi Direct Option.
NOTE: Wi-Fi Direct Option:
–

Wi-Fi Direct option appears on the screen only if your printer supports this feature.

–

Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Dell Printer Manager

–

Network Name(SSID): The default Network Name is the model name and the
maximum length is 22 characters (not including "Direct-xx-").

–

Network Key is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.

Click Next when the Confirm Printer Connection window appears.

Click Finish.

Using a network cable
Your machine is a network compatible machine. To enable your machine to work with your
network, you will need to perform some configuration procedures.
NOTE: After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application. See "Wireless network setup (Dell
B2375dfw only)".
See your network administrator, or the person that set up your wireless
network, for information about your network configuration.
•

Items to prepare
–

Access point

–

Network-connected computer

–

Software CD that was provided with your machine

–

A machine installed with a wireless network interface

–

Network cable

Printing a network configuration report
You can identify the network settings of your machine by printing a network configuration
report.
See "Printing a network configuration report"

- 235 -

IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)
This program is used to manually set the network IP address of your machine using its MAC
address to communicate with the machine. The MAC address is the hardware serial number
of the network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
See "Setting IP address"

Configuring the machine’s wireless network
Before starting you will need to know the network name (SSID) of your wireless network and
the Network Password if it is encrypted. This information was set when the access point (or
wireless router) was installed. If you do not know about your wireless environment, please
ask the person who set up your network.

Turning the Wi-Fi network on/off (Dell B2375dfw Mono
MFP only)
There are two methods available to disconnect the wireless network on your machine.
a

Press
(WPS) button (on the control panel) less than 2 seconds
Off .
the home screen)

Press My Settings
Machine Setup
Network Setup
Activate
Off from the home screen.

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi (from
Wi-Fi

Also you can turn the Wi-Fi network on/off in the Embedded Web Service.
1

Check whether the machine is connected to the network.

Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter your
machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example,

Click Login on the upper right of the Embedded Web Service website.

Type in the ID and Password then click Login.If it’s your first time Logging into
Embedded Web Service, type in the below default ID and password. We recommend
you to change the default password for security reasons.

5
6

•
ID: admin
•
Password: admin
When the Embedded Web Service window opens, click Settings
Settings.
Click Wireless

Custom.

You can also turn the Wi-Fi network on/off.

- 236 -

Network

Setting the Wi-Fi Direct for mobile printing
Wi-Fi Direct is an easy-to-setup peer-to-peer connection method between the Wi-Fi Direct
certified printer and a mobile device that provides a secure connection and better
throughput than ad hoc mode.
With Wi-Fi Direct, you can connect your printer to a Wi-Fi Direct network while
concurrently connecting to an access point. You can also use a wired network and a Wi-Fi
Direct network simultaneously so multiple users can access and print documents both from
Wi-Fi Direct and from a wired network.
•

You cannot connect your mobile device to the internet through the printer’s
Wi-Fi Direct.

•

The supported protocol list may differ from your model, Wi-Fi Direct networks
do NOT support IPv6, network filtering, IPSec, WINS, and SLP services.

•

The maximum number of devices that can be connected via Wi-Fi Direct is 3.

Setting up Wi-Fi Direct
You can enable Wi-Fi Direct feature by one of the following methods.

From the USB cable-connected computer(recommended)
After the driver installation is complete, Dell Printer Manager can be set and changes in the
Wi-Fi Direct can be made.
NOTE: Dell Printer Manager is Available for Windows and Mac OS users only.
–

Click Start
Manager

•
•

Wi-Fi Direct On/Off: Select On to enable.
Device Name: Enter the printer’s name for searching for your printer on a wireless
network. By default, the device name is the model name.
IP Address: Enter the IP address of the printer. This IP address is used only for the
local network and not for the infrastructure wired or wireless network. We
recommend using the default local IP address (the default local IP address of the
printer for Wi-Fi Direct is 192.168.3.1 )
Group Owner: Activate this option to assign the printer the Wi-Fi Direct group’s
owner. The Group Owner acts similar to a wireless access point. We recommend
activating this option.
Network Password: If your printer is a Group Owner, a Network Password is
required for other mobile devices to connect to your printer. You can configure a
Network Password yourself, or can remember the given Network Password that
is randomly generated by default.

•

•
•

Programs or All Programs
Device Settings
Network.

- 237 -

Dell Printers

Dell Printer

From the machine (Machines with a display screen)
•

Select My Settings
Machine Setup
from the touch screen.

•

On/Off: Select On to enable.

Network Setup

Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi Direct

From the network-connected computer
If your printer is using a network cable or a wireless access point, you can enable and
configure Wi-Fi Direct from Embedded Web Service.
•

When the Embedded Web Service window opens, click Settings
Wireless
Wi-Fi Direct
Custom.

•

Enable or disable Wi-Fi Direct and set other options.

Network Settings

Setting up the mobile device
•

After setting up Wi-Fi Direct from the printer, refer to the user manual of the mobile
device you are using to set its Wi-Fi Direct.

•

After setting up Wi-Fi Direct, you need to download the mobile printing application
(For example: Dell Mobile printer) to print from your smartphone.
NOTE: If your mobile device does not support WPS, you need to enter the "Network
Password" of a printer instead of pushing the WPS button.

- 238 -

Troubleshooting for wireless network
Problems during setup or driver installation
Connecting Failure - Verify Wireless Network Name
•

The machine is unable to find the network name (SSID) you have selected or entered.
Check the network name (SSID) on your access point and try connecting again.

•

Your access point is not turned on. Turn on your access point.

Connecting Failure - Verify Network Security Key
•

Security is not configured correctly. Check the configured security on your access
point and machine.

Connecting Failure - Verify Wireless Connection
•

Your computer is not receiving a signal from your machine. Check the USB cable and
your machine’s power.

Connecting Failure - Unplug Ethernet Cable
•

Your machine is connected with a wired network cable. Remove the wired network
cable from your machine.

Verify USB Connection
•

When you access point via USB cable, unpluged USB cable. Check the USB cable.

Veriy IP Address
•

Your machine is not receiving a IP from AP. Check the configured security on your
access point and machine.

Verify Network Settings
•

The configured network address is unable to connect between your computer and
machine.
–

For a DHCP network environment
The receives the IP address automatically (DHCP) when computer is configured
to DHCP.

–

For a Static network environment
The machine uses the static address when the computer is configured to static
address.
For example,

- 239 -

If the computer’s network information is as shown below:
•
IP address: 169.254.133.42
•
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Then the machine’s network information should be as below:
•
•
•

IP address: 169.254.133.43
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
Gateway: 169.254.133.1

Other problems
If problems occur while using the machine on a network, check the following:
NOTE: For information on the access point (or wireless router), refer to its own
user's guide.
•

Your computer, access point (or wireless router), or machine may not be turned on.

•

Check the wireless reception around the machine. If the router is far from the machine
or there is an obstacle, you might have difficulty receiving the signal.

•

Cycle the power for the access point (or wireless router), machine, and computer.
Sometimes cycling the power can recover network communication.

•

Check whether firewall software (V3 or Norton) is blocking the communication.
If the computer and the machine are connected on the same network and it cannot
be found when searching, firewall software might be blocking the communication.
Refer to the user's guide for the software to turn it off and try searching for the
machine again.

•

Check whether the machine's IP address is allocated correctly. You can check the IP
address by printing the network configuration report.

•

Check whether the access point (or wireless router) has a configured security
(password). If it has a password, refer to the access point (or wireless router)
administrator.

•

Check the machine's IP address. Reinstall the machine driver and change the settings
to connect to the machine on the network. Due to the characteristics of DHCP, the
allocated IP address could change if the machine is not used for a long time or if the
access point has been reset.
Register the product's MAC address when you confogure the DHCP server on the
access point (or wireless router). Then you can always use the IP address that is set
with the MAC address. You can identify the Mac address of your machine by printing a
network configuration repor. See "Printing a network configuration report".

•

Check the wireless environment. You might not be able to connect to the network in
the infrastructure environment where you need to type in a user's information before
connecting to the access point (or wireless router).

•

This machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g/n and Wi-Fi. Other wireless
communication types (e.g., Bluetooth) are not supported.

- 240 -

•

When using the ad hoc mode, in operating systems such as Windows Vista, you might
need to set the wireless connection setting every time you use the wireless machine.

•

You cannot use infrastructure mode and ad hoc mode at the same time for Dell
wireless network machines.

•

The machine is within the range of the wireless network.

•

The machine is located away from obstacles that could block the wireless signal.
Remove any large metal objects between the access point (or wireless router) and the
machine.
Make sure the machine and wireless access point (or wireless router) are not separated
by poles, walls, or support columns containing metal or concrete.

•

The machine is located away from other electronic devices that may interfere with the
wireless signal.
Many devices can interfere with the wireless signal, including a microwave oven and
some Bluetooth devices.

•

Whenever the configuration of your access point (or wireless router) changes, you
must do the product's wireless network setup again.

•

If Wi-Fi Direct is ON, this machine only supports IEEE 802.11 b/g.

•

If the access point is set to work with the 802.11n standard only, it may notconnect to
your machine.

- 241 -

Mobile Printing
The Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP and Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP support printing from a
variety of mobile devices.

Android™ OS
•

Download the Dell Mobile Print app for free from Google Play™. Easy to use and
navigate, the Dell Mobile Print app enables direct printing of photos, documents, web
content and more, to supported Dell Printers on a Wi-Fi or Ethernet network.

Apple® iOS
•

These printers are compatible with AirPrint™. For details on AirPrint, refer to AirPrint.

•

These printers are also compatible with Mobile Print App for Dell by Thinxtream™,
available for free download from iTunes®.

Scan the QR codes for quick access to the relevant application store.

- 242 -

AirPrint
NOTE: Only AirPrint certified machines can use the AirPrint feature. Check the box
your machine came in for the AirPrint certified mark.
AirPrint allows you to wirelessly print directly from an iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch
running the latest version of iOS.

Setting up AirPrint
Bonjour(mDNS) and IPP protocols are required on your machine to use the AirPrint feature.
You can enable the AirPrint feature by one of the following methods.
1

Check whether the machine is connected to the network.

Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer, Safari, or Firefox and enter your
machine’s new IP address in the browser window.
For example,

Click Login on the upper right of the Embedded Web Service website.

5
6

•
ID: admin
•
Password: admin
When the Embedded Web Service window opens, click Settings
Settings.

Network

Click AirPrint.
You can enable AirPrint.

Printing via AirPrint
For example, the iPad manual provides these instructions:
1

Open your email, photo, web page, or document you want to print.

Touch the action icon(

Select your printer driver name and option menu to set up.

Touch Print button. Print it out.

NOTE: Cancelling print job: To cancel the printing job or view the print
summary, click the print center icon (
) in multitasking area. You can click
cancel in the print center.

- 243 -

Google Cloud Print™
Google Cloud Print™ is a service that allows you to print to a printer using your smart
phone, tablet, or any other web-connected devices. Just register your Google account with
the printer, and you are ready to use the Google Cloud Print™ service. You can print your
document or email with Chrome OS, Chrome browser, or a Gmail™/ Google Docs™
application on your mobile device, so you don’t need to install the printer driver on the
mobile device. Refer to the Google website (http://support.google.com/cloudprint) for
more information about Google Cloud Print™.

Registering your Google account to the printer
NOTE: Make sure the printer machine is turned on and connected to a wired or
wireless network that has access to the Internet.
You should create your Google account in advance.
1

Open the Chrome browser.

Visit www.google.com.

Enter your printer’s IP address in the address field and press the Enter key or click Go.

Click Login in the upper right corner of the Embedded Web Service website.

Enter your printer’s name and description..

Click Register.
The confirmation pop-up window appears.
NOTE: If you set the browser to block pop-ups, the confirmation window will
not appear. Allow the site to show pop-ups.

Click Finish printer registration.

Click Manage your printers.
Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print™ service.
Google Cloud Print™-ready devices will appear in the list.

- 244 -

Printing with Google Cloud Print™
The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you are using. You
can see the application list that supports Google Cloud Print™ service.
NOTE: Make sure the printer is turned on and connected to a wired or wireless
network that has access to the Internet.

Printing from an application on mobile device
The following steps are an example of using the Google Docs™ app from Android mobile
phone.
1

Install the Cloud Print application on your mobile device.
NOTE: If you do not have the application, download it from the application
store such as Android Market or App Store.

Access the Google Docs™ application from your mobile device.

Tap the option

Tap the send

Tap the Cloud Print

Set the printing options if you want.

Tap Click here to Print.

button of the document that you want to print.
button.
button.

Printing from the Chrome browser
The following steps are an example of using the Chrome browser.
1

Run Chrome.

Open the document or email that you want to print.

Click the wrench icon

Click Print. A new tab for printing appears.

in the browser’s top right corner.

Select Print with Google Cloud Print.

Click the Print button.

- 245 -

Faxing
Setting the Printer ID
Setting up the Fax System
Sending a Fax
Receiving a Fax
Automatic Dialing
Other Ways to Fax
Additional Features

- 246 -

Setting the Printer ID
In most countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on any fax you send.
The printer ID, containing your telephone number and name or company name, will be
printed at the top of each page sent from your printer.
1

Press My Settings
Machine Setup
from the home screen.

Enter the Fax and ID field using the pop-up keyboard.

Initial Setup

Machine ID & Fax Number

Setting up the Fax System
Changing the Fax Setup Options
1

Press My Settings
home screen.

Select to find the status to enter the value for the option you have selected.

Machine Setup

Default Setting

Fax Default from the

Available Fax Defaults Options
You can use the following setup options for configuring the fax system:
Option

Description

Darkness

You can select the default darkness value to fax your documents
(-5 ~ 5).

Quality

You can select the default resolution setting to Standard, Fine, Super
Fine.

Original Type

You can select the type of original you are faxing. This will give you a
better fax.

Original Size

You can sets the image size.

Duplex

This function is especially intended for two-sided originals. You can
select whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of
the paper.
• 1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.
• 2->1 Side Long Edge: Scans both sides of the originals and prints each
of them on a separate sheet.
• 2->1 Side Short Edge: Scans both sides of the originals and prints each
one on a separate sheet, but the information on the back side of the
printout is rotate 180°.

- 247 -

Testing Fax line connection
1

Press My Settings

Press Check(

Fax Line Test from the home screen.

Maintenance
) from the screen.

The printer display the test result.
If the fax line connection test has failed, check the telephone line cord connection or
contact your telephone service provider.
NOTE: If test pass - you can start using the Fax functionality
If test fail - Need to direct them to the troubleshooting section for fax.

- 248 -

Sending a Fax
Adjusting the Document Darkness
Use the darkness setting to fax your documents lighter or darker.
1

Press Fax from the home screen.

Press the Setting(

Press the left/right arrows to select Darkness.

Select the darkness level(-5 ~ 5) you want.
•
•
•

) from the screen.

1 : works well with dark print.
2: works well with standard typed or printed documents.
3: works well with light print or faint pencil markings.

Adjusting the Document Quality
Use the Quality setting to improve the output quality of the original or to scan photographs.
1

Press Fax from the home screen.

Press the Setting(

Press the left/right arrows to select Quality.

Select the quality mode you want.

) from the screen.

The document types recommended for the quality settings are described in the table below.
Mode

Recommended for:

Standard

Documents with normal sized characters.

Fine

Documents containing small characters or thin lines or
documents printed using a dot-matrix printer.

Super Fine

Documents containing extremely fine detail. The super fine
mode is enabled only if the remote printer also supports the
Super Fine resolution. See the notes below.

NOTE: Faxes scanned in Super Fine quality will transmit at the highest resolution
supported by the receiving device.

- 249 -

Sending a Fax
1

Press Fax from the home screen.

Press the Direct Input or Address (

If necessary, adjust the document darkness and resolution to suit your fax needs. See
"Adjusting the Document Darkness" or "Adjusting the Document Quality"

) from the screen.

Enter the remote fax phone number using the pop-up keyboard.

Press Start ( ) from the screen.

When the document is loaded from the document glass, the display shows Another
Page? on the screen after the document is scanned into the memory. If you have
additional pages, remove the scanned page and load the next page from the glass and
select Yes. Repeat as necessary.
After all of the pages are scanned, select No when the display shows Another Page?

it dials the number then sends the fax when the printer establishes contact with the
receiving machine.
NOTE: Press

to cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax.

- 250 -

Speed Dial Fax
1

Press Speed Dial Fax from the home screen.
OR
Press All Applicatons (

)

Speed Dial Fax from the screen.

Select to destination from speed dial list.

Press Start ( ) from the screen.

it dials the number then sends the fax when the printer establishes contact with the
receiving machine.

- 251 -

Group Dial Fax
1

Press Group Dial Fax from the home screen.

Select to destination from group dial list.

Press Start ( ) from the screen.

- 252 -

On Hook Fax
1

Press On Hook Fax from the home screen.
OR
Press All Applicatons (

)

On Hook Fax from the home screen.

If necessary, adjust the document darkness and resolution to suit your fax needs. See
"Adjusting the Document Darkness" or "Adjusting the Document Quality"

Press On Hook (

Enter the remote fax machine’s fax number using the popup keyboard.

Press Start ( ) from the screen.

) from the screen.

Confirming Transmissions
When the last page of your document has been sent successfully, the printer beeps and
returns to Standby mode.
If something goes wrong while sending your fax, an error message appears on the display.
For a listing of error messages and their meanings, see "Clearing LCD Error Messages".
If you receive an error message, press
again.

to clear the message and try to send the document

You can set your printer to print a confirmation report automatically after each fax
transmission. For further details, see the MSG Confirm item in "Available Fax Defaults
Options".

- 253 -

Automatic Redialing
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax, the
machine automatically redials the number. The redial time depends on the country's factory
default setting.
To change the time interval between redials and the number of redial attempts, see
"Available Fax Defaults Options".

Redialing fax number
When you want to redial the last fax number you have sent, you can use this feature.
1

Press Fax from the home screen.
OR
Press All Applicatons (

)

Fax from the home screen.

Press Redial on control pannel or Caller ID from the screen. If you select the Caller ID,
ten recently sent fax numbers with ten received Caller IDs are shown.

Select the fax number you want.

If necessary, adjust the document darkness and resolution to suit your fax needs. See
"Adjusting the Document Darkness" or "Adjusting the Document Quality"

Press Start ( ) from the screen.

it dials the number then sends the fax when the printer establishes contact with the
receiving machine.

- 254 -

Receiving a Fax
About Receiving Modes
NOTE: To use the Ans/Fax mode, attach an answering machine to the extension
telephone socket ( ) on the back of your printer.
When the memory is full, the printer can no longer receive any incoming fax. Secure free
memory to resume by canceling printing received faxes.

Loading Paper for Receiving Faxes
The instructions for loading paper in the paper tray are the same whether you are printing,
faxing, or copying, except that faxes can only be printed on Letter-, A4-, or Legal-sized
paper. For details about loading paper, see "Loading Paper". For details about setting the
paper type and size in the tray, see "Setting the Paper Type" and "Setting the Paper Size".

Receiving Automatically in the Fax Mode
Your printer is preset to the fax mode at the factory.
When you receive a fax, the printer answers the call on a specified number of rings and
automatically receives the fax.
To change the number of rings, see "Available Fax Defaults Options".
If you want to adjust the ringer volume, see "Setting the Sound/Volume (Administrator
only)".

Receiving Automatically in the Ans/Fax Mode
If you are using an answering machine in this mode, attach it to the extension telephone
socket ( ) on the back of your printer.
If your printer does not detect a fax tone, the answering machine will take the call. If your
printer detects a fax tone, it automatically initiates reception of the fax.
NOTE: If you have set your printer to Ans/Fax mode and your answering machine is
switched off, or no answering machine is connected to your machine, your printer
may automatically go into Fax mode after a predefined number of rings.

Receiving Manually Using an Extension Telephone
This features works best when you are using an extension telephone connected to the
extension telephone socket ( ) on the back of your printer. You can receive a fax from
someone you are talking to on the extension telephone without having to go to the fax
machine.
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press the keys *9* (star
nine star) on the extension telephone.

- 255 -

The printer receives the document.
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the remote printer,
try pressing *9* once again.
*9* is the remote receive code preset at the factory. The first and the last asterisks are fixed,
but you can change the middle number to whatever you choose. The code should be one
digit. For details on changing the code, see "Available Fax Defaults Options".

Receiving Faxes Using the DRPD Mode
“Distinctive Ring” is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single
telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers. The particular number
someone uses to call you on is identified by different ringing patterns, available in
combinations of long and short ringing sounds.
Using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection feature, your fax machine can “learn” the ring
pattern you designate to be answered by the FAX machine. This ringing pattern may be
recognized and answered as a FAX call, and all other ringing patterns will be forwarded to
the extension telephone or answering machine plugged into the extension telephone
socket ( ) on the back of your printer. You can easily suspend or change Distinctive Ring
Pattern Detection at any time.
Before using the Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection option, Distinctive Ring service must be
installed on your telephone line by the telephone company. To set up Distinctive Ring
Pattern Detection, you may need another telephone line at your location, dial your FAX
number from another line.
To set up the DRPD mode:
1

Press My Settings
screen.

Press Next(

Call your fax number from another telephone. It is not necessary to place the call from
a fax machine.

When your printer begins to ring, do not answer the call. The printer requires several
rings to learn the pattern.

When the printer completes learning, the displays shows Complete DRPD Setup.

Press the home icon (

Machine Setup

Fax Setup

DRPD Mode from the home

) from the screen.

) to return to Home Screen.

When the DRPD feature is set up, the DRPD option is available in the Receive Mode menu.
To receive faxes in the DRPD mode, you need to set the menu to DRPD; see "Available Fax
Defaults Options".
NOTE: DRPD must be set up again if you re-assign your fax number, or connect the
printer to another telephone line.
NOTE: After DRPD has been set up, call your fax number again to verify that the
printer answers with a fax tone. Then call a different number assigned to that same
line to ensure the call is forwarded to the extension telephone or answering
machine plugged into the extension telephone socket ( ) on the back of the
printer.

- 256 -

Receiving Faxes in the Memory
Since your printer is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while performing other
tasks. If you receive a fax while you are copying, printing, or run out of paper or toner, your
printer stores incoming faxes in the memory. As soon as you finish copying, printing, or
resupply the consumables, the printer automatically prints the fax.

Automatic Dialing
Speed Dialing
You can store up to 400 frequently dialed numbers in one, two or three-digit speed dial
locations (1-400).

Storing a Number for Speed Dialing
1

Press My Settings

Address Book from the home screen.

Press Add (

Press New Individual .

Enter the name, Email address and phone number in the each field with the pop up
keyboard. And thenPress the up/down arrows to select speed dial number.

Press Check(

Press the home icon (

) icon.

) from the screen.
) to return to Home Screen.

Sending a Fax using a Speed Number
1

- 257 -

Press Fax from the home screen.

Press the Direct Input from the screen.

If necessary, adjust the document darkness and resolution to suit your fax needs. See
"Adjusting the Document Darkness" or "Adjusting the Document Quality"

Enter the remote fax speed dial number and holding when entering last number until
shows dial number.
ex) Speed dial number is “102”, enter the “10” and holding “2”.

Press Start ( ) from the screen.

it dials the number then sends the fax when the printer establishes contact with the
receiving machine.
NOTE: Press

to cancel the fax job at any time while sending the fax.

- 258 -

Group
If you frequently send the same document to several destinations, you can create a group
of these destinations and set them under a one. This enables you to use a group setting to
send the same document to all the destinations in the group.
NOTE: You cannot include one group dial number within another group dial
number.

Setting Group
1

Press My Settings

Press Add (

Address Book from the home screen.

) icon.

Press New Group .

Enter the group name then press the Add (

Select the speed you want at list.

Press Check(

Press the home icon (

) icon from the screen.

) from the screen.
) to return to Home Screen.

Editing Group
You can delete a specific member from a selected group or add a new number to the
selected group.
1

Press My Settings

Select group you want.

Address Book from the home screen..

You can edit Group Name and add or delete member.

Press Check(

Press the home icon (

) from the screen.
) to return to Home Screen.

- 259 -

Other Ways to Fax
Sending a fax in the computer
You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine.
To send a fax from your computer, the Network PC Fax program must be installed. This
program will be installed when you installed the printer driver.
1

Open the document to be sent.

Select Print from the File menu.
The Print window will be displayed. It may look slightly different depending on your
application.

Select Dell Network PC Fax from the Print window

Click Print or OK.

Enter the recipients’ numbers and select the option
NOTE: Select the Help menu from the window and click on any option you
want to know about.

Click Send.

Sending a Delayed Fax
You can set your printer to store and then send a fax at a later time.
NOTE: You can also using this function in Speed Dial Fax and Group Dial Fax.
1

Press Fax from the home screen.
OR
Press All Applicatons (

)

Fax from the home screen.

Press the Setting(

) from the screen.

Press the left/right arrows to select Sending Type

Press the up/down arrows to set the Start Time.

Press Check(

If necessary, adjust the document darkness and resolution to suit your fax needs. See
"Adjusting the Document Darkness" or "Adjusting the Document Quality"

Press Check(

Press the Direct Input or Address (

Delay Send.

) from the screen.

) from the screen.
) from the screen.

- 260 -

Press Start ( ) from the screen.
When the document is loaded on the document glass, the display asks if you want to
send another page. Select Yes to add more documents or No to begin sending the fax
immediately.

Fax Forward to Email addresses
You can set the printer to forward all outgoing or incoming faxes to the Email addresses.
1

Press My Settings
Machine Setup
Forward from the home screen.

Select On in the Configuration.

Select Forward to Email.

Press the Direct Input or Address (

Send Forward or Receive

Fax Setup

) from the screen and input you want.

Select the option you want at Attachment Type (

Press Check(

Press the home icon (

) or From Address(

) from the screen.
) to return to Home Screen.

Additional Features
Toll Save Mode (Administrator only)
The Toll Save mode can be used to save scanned documents for transmission at a specified
time in order to take advantage of lower long distance rates.
To turn the Toll Save mode on:
1

Press My Settings
screen.

Press the left/right arrows to display On.

Select the Start Date and End Date each using the up/down arrows.

Enter the date and time each using the up/down arrows.

Select the Start Time and End Time each using the up/down arrows.

Machine Setup

Fax Setup

Toll Save from the home

Date= “dd/mm/yyyy”
Day= 01 ~ 31
Month= 01 ~ 12
Year= 2000 ~ 2036
Hour= 01 ~ 12 (12-hour mode)
00 ~ 23 (24-hour mode)
NOTE: You can sets the clock mode, See "Setting the Clock Mode
(Administrator only)".
6

Press the Check(

) to complete.

- 261 -

Once Toll Save mode is activated, your printer stores all of the documents to be faxed into
its memory and sends them at the programmed time.
To turn Toll Save mode off, follow steps 1 in "Toll Save Mode (Administrator only)" and then
press the left/right arrows until Off displays.

Using the Secure Receiving Mode (Administrator only)
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by unauthorized people.
You can turn on the secure fax mode using the Secure Receive option to restrict printing out
received faxes when the printer is unattended. In the secure fax mode, all incoming faxes
may go into memory. When the mode turns off, any faxes stored may be printed.
NOTE: If the display shows a Memory Full message, your machine cannot receive
fax. Delete any documents you no longer need from the memory.
To turn the secure receiving mode on:
1

Press My Settings
home screen.

Select On in the Configuration.

Machine Setup

Fax Setup

Secure Receive from the

Enter a four-digit passcode you want to use, using the keyboard.

Re-enter the passcode again and press Check(

Press the home icon (

) from the screen.

) to return to Home Screen.

When a fax is received in the secure receiving mode, your printer stores it into memory
and displays Secure Receive to let you know that there is a fax stored.
To print received documents:
1

Press Job Status(

Select My Settings
from the screen.

) button from the panel.

Enter the four-digit passcode and Press Start ( ) from the screen.

Machine Setup

Job management

Secure Receive Print

The faxes stored in the memory are printed.
To turn the secure receiving mode off:
1

Press My Settings
home screen.

Select Off in the Configuration.

Enter the four-digit passcode and press OK.

Machine Setup

Fax Setup

Secure Receive from the

The mode is deactivated and the printer prints all of the faxes which have been stored
in memory.
4

Press the home icon (

) to return to Home Screen.

- 262 -

Using Advanced Fax Settings
Your printer has various user-selectable setting options for sending or receiving faxes. These
options are preset at the factory, but you may need to change them. To find out how the
options are currently set, print the System Data list. For details about printing the list, see
"Reports".

Changing Setting Options
1

Press My Settings

Machine Setup from the home screen.

Select Fax Setup.

Select fax setting option you want.

When the option that you want displays, choose the desired status by pressing the
left/right arrows.

Press the home icon (

) to return to Home Screen.

Advanced Fax Setting Options
Option

Description

Send Forward

You can set the printer to always forward all of the outgoing faxes
to the specified destination besides the fax numbers you entered.
Select Off to turn this feature off.
Select On to turn this feature on. You can set the number of the
remote fax machine to which the faxes are forwarded. You can
foward to Fax(1), Email(20), Network folder or FTP(20). Number in
the “()” is available to regist numers.

Receive Forward

You can set your printer to forward incoming faxes to another fax
number during a specified time period. When a fax arrives at your
printer, it is stored in the memory. Then, the printer dials the fax
number that you have specified and sends the fax.
Select Off to turn this feature off.
Select On to turn this feature on. You can set the fax number to
which the faxes are forwarded and the start time and the end time.
Also, you can forward incoming faxes up to 25 fax numbers. You
can foward to Fax(1), Email(20), SMB(20), PC(1). Number in the “()”
is available to regist numers.

Toll Save

You can set your printer to store your faxes in memory and to send
them at the specified toll-saving time. For details about sending
toll save faxes, see "Toll Save Mode (Administrator only)".
Select Off to turn this feature off.
Select On to turn this feature on. You can set the start time and
date; and the end time and date for toll save mode.

- 263 -

Option

Description

Junk Fax Setup

Using the Junk Fax Setup feature, the system will not accept faxes
sent from remote stations. Their numbers are stored in the
memory as junk fax numbers. This feature is useful for blocking
any unwanted faxes.
Select Off to turn the feature off. Anybody can send you a fax.
Select On to turn the feature on. You can set up to 10 fax numbers
as junk fax numbers. After storing the numbers, you do not receive
any faxes from the registered stations.

Secure Receive

You can keep your received faxes from being accessed by
unauthorized people.
For further details about setting this mode, see "Using the Secure
Receiving Mode (Administrator only)".

Prefix Dial

You can set a prefix dial number of up to five digits. This number
dials before any auto dial number is started. It is useful for
accessing the PABX exchange.

Stamp Received
Name

This option allows the printer to automatically print the page
number, and the date and time of the reception at the bottom of
each page of a received document.
Select Off to turn this feature off.
Select On to turn this feature on.

ECM Mode

The Error Correction Mode helps with poor line quality and
ensures that faxes are sent smoothly to any other ECM-equipped
fax machine. If the line quality is poor, it takes more time to send a
fax when you are using the ECM mode.
Select Off to turn this feature off.
Select On to turn this feature on.

Modem Speed

Select the maximum modem speed you want if the phone line fails
to sustain a higher modem speed. You can select 33.6, 28.8, 14.4,
12.0, 9.6, or 4.8 kbps.

Ring to Answer

Specifies the number of times the machine rings before answering
an incoming call.

Receive Mode

Selects the default fax receiving mode.

Redial Delay

Sets the time interval before automatic redialling.

Redial Attempt

Sets the number of redial attempts. If you enter 0, the machine will
not redial.

MSG Confirm

Sets the machine to print a report whether a fax transmission was
successfully completed or not.

- 264 -

Option

Description

Auto Report

A report with detailed information about the previous 50
communications operations, including time and dates. The
available options are On or Off.

Auto Reduction

Automatically reduces an incoming fax page to fit the size of the
paper loaded in the machine.

Discard Size

Discards a specific length from the end of the received fax.

Recieve Code

Initiates fax reception from an extension phone plugged into the
EXT socket on the back of the machine. If you pick up the
extension phone and hear fax tones, enter the code. It is preset to
*9* at the factory.

DRPD Mode

Enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several
different telephone numbers. You can set the machine to
recognize different ring patterns for each number. This setting may
not be available depending on your country

Tray

You can select the tray to printing the receive fax.

Print Duplex

You can set the machine to print received faxes on both sides of
paper. The available options are Off, Long Edge, and Short Edge.

Fax Setup Wizard

Frequently used functions are gathered for users to set fax settings
easily.

Using an Answering machine
Telephone Answering Device

Line

Line
LINE

Phone

EXT

Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP
Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP

Figure 1

You can connect a telephone answering device (TAD) directly to the back of your printer as
shown in Figure 1.
Set your printer to Ans/Fax mode and set the Ring to Answer to a digit greater than the
Rings to Answer setting for the TAD.

- 265 -

•

When the TAD picks up the call, the printer monitors and takes the line if fax tones are
received and then starts receiving the fax.

•

If the answering device is off, the printer automatically goes into Fax mode after a
predefined number of rings.

•

If you answer the call and hear fax tones, the printer will answer the fax call if you
access Fax → On Hook Dial and press Start ( ) and then hang up the receiver, or
press the remote receive code *9* and hang up the receiver.

Using a Computer Modem
Line

Telephone Answering Device
Line

LINE

Computer

Phone

EXT

Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP / Dell B2375dnf Mono MFP
Figure 2

If you want to use your computer modem for faxing or for a dial-up internet connection,
connect the computer modem directly to the back of your printer with the TAD as shown
here in Figure 2.
•

Set your printer to Ans/Fax mode and set the Ring to Answer to a digit greater than
the rings to answer setting for the TAD.

•

Turn off the computer modem's fax-receive feature.

•

Do not use the computer modem if your printer is sending or receiving a fax.

•

To fax via the computer modem, follow the instructions provided with your computer
modem and fax application.

•

You can capture images using your printer and Dell ScanDirect and send them using
your fax application with the computer modem.

- 266 -

Mac
Installing Software for Mac
Printing
Scanning
Wireless network setup

- 267 -

Your printer supports Mac systems with a built-in USB interface or network interface card.
When you print a file from a Mac computer, you can use the PostScript driver by installing
the PPD file.

Installing Software for Mac
The Drivers and Documentation CD that came with your printer provides you with the PPD
file that allows you to use the PostScript driver, for printing on a Mac computer.
Verify the following before you install the printer software:
Operating System

Requirements
CPU

RAM

Mac OS X 10.5

• 867MHz or faster
Power PC G4/G5
• Intel processors

Mac OS X 10.6

Free Disk Space
512 MB (1 GB)

1 GB

• Intel processors

1 GB (2GB)

1 GB

Mac OS X 10.7 - 10.8 • Intel processors

1 GB (2GB)

1 GB

Install the printer driver
1

Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.

Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.

Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
•

For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.

Double-click the MAC_Installer

Click Continue.

Read the license agreement and click Continue.

Click Agree to Agree to the license agreement.

Click Install All components necessary for machine operations will be installed.
•

Installer OS X icon.

If you click Customize you can choose individual components to install.

Enter the password and click OK.

Select USB Connected Printer on the Printer Connection Type and click Continue.

Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer list.
•

If your machine supports fax, click Add Fax button to select your fax and add it
to your fax list

After the installation is finished, click Close.

- 268 -

ReInstallation the printer driver
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
1

Open the Applications folder

To uninstall printer software, click Continue.

Dell

Printer Software Uninstaller.

Check the program you want to delete and click Uninstall.

Enter the password and click OK.

After the uninstallation is finished, click Close.
NOTE: If a machine has already been added, delete it from the Print Setup
Utility or Print & Fax.

Installing driver over the network
1

Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.

Insert the supplied software CD into your CD-ROM drive.

Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop.
•

For Mac OS X 10.8, double-click the CD-ROM that appears on Finder.

Double-click the MAC_Installer

Installer OS X icon.

Click Continue.

Read the license agreement and click Continue.

Click Agree to Agree to the license agreement.

Click Install All components necessary for machine operations will be installed.

Enter the password and click OK.

•

If you click Customize you can choose individual components to install.

Select Network Connected Printer (Wired or Wireless) on the Printer Connection
Type and click Continue.

Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer list.

Click IP and select HP Jetdirect - Socket in Protocol.

Enter the machine’s IP address in the Address input field.

Enter the queue name in the Queue input field. If you cannot determine the queue
name for your machine server, try using the default queue first.

If Auto Select does not work properly, choose Select Printer Software and your
machine name in Print Using.

Click Add.

After the installation is finished, click Close.

- 269 -

Printing
Printing a Document
When you print with a Mac, you need to check the printer software setting in each
application you use. Follow these steps to print from a Mac.
1

Open the document to print.

Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document Setup in some applications).

Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, and other options and click OK.

Open the File menu and click Print.

Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print.

Click Print.

Changing Printer Settings
You can use advanced printing features when using your printer.
From your Mac application, select Print from the File menu.

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This feature provides a
cost-effective way to print draft pages.
1

Open an application, and select Print from the File menu.

Select Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation. In the Pages per Sheet
drop-down list, select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet of paper.

Select the other options to use.

Click Print. The machine prints the selected number of pages to print on one sheet of
paper.

Printing on Both Sides of the Paper
Before printing in the duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding your finished
document. The binding options are, as follows:
Long-Edge Binding: This option is the conventional layout used in book binding.
Short-Edge Binding: This option is the type often used with calendars.
CAUTION: If you print more than 2 copies, the first copy and the second copy
might print on the same sheet of paper. Avoid printing on both sides of paper when
you are printing more than 1 copy.
1

From your Mac application, select Print from the File menu.

Select the Layout from the drop-down list under Orientation.

- 270 -

Select a binding orientation from Two Sided option.

Select the other options to use.

Click Print and the printer prints on both sides of the paper.

Using help
Click the question mark on the bottom-left corner of the window and click on the topic you
want to know about. A pop-up window appears with information about that option's
feature, which is provided from the driver.

- 271 -

Scanning
You can scan documents using Image Capture. Mac OS offers Image Capture.
1

Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.

Load the document(s) face up into the DADF.
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
For details about loading a document, see "Loading an Original Document".

Start Applications and click Image Capture.
NOTE: If No Image Capture device connected message appears, disconnect
the USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem persists, please refer to the
Image Capture’s help.

Select the option you want.

Scan and save your scanned image.
NOTE: If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update Mac OS to the
latest version.

Wireless network setup
Access point via USB cable in Mac
Items to prepare
–

Access point

–

Network-connected computer

–

Software CD that was provided with your machine

–

The machine installed with a wireless network interface

–

USB cable

Check whether the USB cable is connected to the machine.

Turn on your computer, access point, and machine.

Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.

Double-click the CD/DVD icon that appears on your Mac desktop.

•
For Mac OS X 10.8, Double-click the CD/DVD icon that appears on your Finder.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder
Installer OS X icon.

- 272 -

Click Continue.

Read the license agreement and click Continue.

Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.

Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.

Enter the password and click OK.

Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection Type and click
Continue.

After searching, the window shows the wireless network devices. Select the name
(SSID) of the access point you are using and click Next.
NOTE: When you set the wireless configuration manually, click Advanced
Setting.
–

Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of access point you want (SSID
is case-sensitive).

–

Operation Mode: Select Infrastructure.

–

Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128, TKIP, AES, TKIP AES).

–

Network Password: Enter the encryption Network Password value.

–

Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption Network Password value.

–

WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key
Index.

The wireless network security window appears when the access point has security
enabled.
– Can start to build Wi-Fi Direct by using Dell Printer Manager. See "Using the Dell
Printer Manager"
–

Network Name(SSID): The default Network Name is the model name and the
maximum length is 22 characters (not including "Direct-xx-").

–

Network Password is the numeric string, and the size is 8 ~ 64 characters.

When the wireless network settings are completed, disconnect the USB cable
between the computer and machine.

Wireless network set up is completed. After the installation is finished, click Quit.

- 273 -

NOTE: After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application. See "Installing Software for Mac"

Ad hoc via USB cable in Mac
If you do not have an access point (AP), you may still connect the machine wirelessly to
your computer by setting up an ad hoc wireless network by following these simple
directions.

Items to prepare
–

Network-connected computer

–

Software CD that was provided with your machine

–

A machine installed with a wireless network interface

–

USB cable

Creating the ad hoc network in Mac
1

Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on.

Insert the supplied software CD into your CD/DVD drive.

Double-click the CD/DVD icon that appears on your Mac desktop.

•
For Mac OS X 10.8, Double-click the CD/DVD icon that appears on your Finder.
Double-click the MAC_Installer folder
Installer OS X icon.

Click Continue.

Read the license agreement and click Continue.

Click Agree to agree to the license agreement.

Click Install. All components necessary for machine operations will be installed.
If you click Customize, you can choose individual components to install.

Enter the password and click OK.

Select Configuration of Wireless network on the Printer Connection Type and click
Continue.

After searching the wireless networks, a list of wireless networks your machine has
searched appears. Click the Advanced Settings button.
NOTE:
–

Enter the wireless Network Name: Enter the SSID of access point you want (SSID
is case-sensitive).

–

Operation Mode: Select ad hoc.

–

Channel: Select the channel (Auto Setting or 2412 MHz to 2467 MHz).

–

Authentication: Select an authentication type.

- 274 -

Open System: Authentication is not used, and encryption may or may not be
used, depending on the need for data security.
Shared Key: Authentication is used. A device that has a proper WEP key can
access the network.
–

Encryption: Select the encryption (None, WEP64, WEP128).

–

Network Password: Enter the encryption Network Password value.

–

Confirm Network Password: Confirm the encryption Network Password value.

–

WEP Key Index: If you are using WEP Encryption, select the appropriate WEP Key
Index.

The wireless network security window appears when the ad hoc network has security
setting.
Select Open System or Shared Key for the authentication and click Next.
–

The window showing the wireless network settings appears. Check the settings and
click Next.
NOTE: Before entering the IP address for the machine, you must know the
computer’s network configuration information. If the computer’s network
configuration is set to DHCP, the wireless network setting should also be
DHCP. Likewise, if the computer’s network configuration is set to Static, the
wireless network setting should also be Static.
If your computer is set to DHCP and you want to use Static wireless network
setting, you must contact the network administrator to get the static IP address.
•

For the DHCP method
If the IP address assignment method is DHCP, check if DHCP is shown in the
Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows Static, click Change
TCP/IP to change the assignment method to Receive IP address automatically
(DHCP).

•

For the Static method
If the IP address assignment method is Static, check if Static is shown in the
Wireless Network Setting Confirm window. If it shows DHCP, click Change
TCP/IP to enter the IP address and other network configuration values for the
machine.
For example,
If the computer’s network information is as shown below:
- IP address: 169.254.133.42
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0

- 275 -

Then, the machine’s network information should be as follows:
- IP address: 169.254.133.43
- Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (Use the computer’s subnet mask.)
- Gateway: 169.254.133.1
13

When the window that tells you that the network cable connection is confirmed
appears, disconnect the network cable and click Next.
If the network cable is connected, it may have trouble finding the machine when
configuring the wireless network.

The wireless network connects according to the network configuration.

Wireless network set up is completed. After installation is finished, click Quit.
NOTE: After completing the wireless network connection, you need to install a
machine driver to print from an application. See "Install the printer driver"

- 276 -

Linux
Getting Started
Installing the MFP Driver
Installing driver over the network
Printing a Document
Printing Files
Scanning a Document

- 277 -

Getting Started
The supplied Drivers and Documentation CD provides you with Dell's MFP driver package
for using your printer with a Linux computer.
Dell's MFP driver package contains printer and scanner drivers, providing the ability to print
documents and scan images. The package also delivers powerful applications for
configuring your printer and further processing of the scanned documents.
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the driver package enables you to monitor
a number of MFP devices via USB port.
The MFP driver package is supplied with a smart and flexible installation program. You do
not need to search for additional components that might be necessary for the MFP
software: all required packages will be carried onto your system and installed automatically;
this is possible on a wide set of the most popular Linux clones.

Installing the MFP Driver
System Requirements
Supported OS
•

RedHat® Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5, 6 (32/ 64 bit)

•

Fedora 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 (32/ 64 bit)

•

SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/ 64 bit)

•

OpenSuSE® 10.2, 10.3, 11.0, 11.1, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4 (32/ 64 bit)

•

Mandriva 2007, 2008, 2009, 2009.1, 2010 (32/64 bit)

•

Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04, 8.10, 9.04, 9.10, 10.04, 10.10, 11.04 (32/ 64 bit)

•

SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10, 11 (32/64 bit)

•

Debian 4.0, 5.0, 6.0 (32/ 64 bit)

Recommended Hardware Requirements
•

Pentium IV 2.4GHz (Intel Core™2)

•

512 MB (1 GB)

•

1 GB (2 GB)

Installing the MFP Driver
1

Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.

When the Administrator Login window appears, type “root” in the Login field and
enter the system password.

- 278 -

NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the printer software. If you
are not a super user, ask your system administrator.
3

From the Dell website, download the Unified Linux Driver package to your computer.

Right-click the Unified Linux Driver package and extract the package.

Double click cdroot

When the welcome screen appears, click Next.

When the installation is complete, click Finish.

autorun.

The installation program added the Unified Driver Configurator desktop icon and the
Unified Driver group to the system menu for your convenience. If you have any difficulties,
consult the on-screen help that is available through your system menu or from the driver
package Windows applications, such as Unified Driver Configurator or Image Manager.

Reinstalling the MFP Driver
If the printer driver does not work properly, uninstall the driver and reinstall it.
1

Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on.

When the Administrator Login window appears, type “root” in the Login field and
enter the system password. You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the
printer driver. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator.

Open the Terminal program. When the Terminal screen appears, type in the following.

•

[root@localhost root]#cd /opt/DELL/mfp/uninstall/
[root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh

Click Next.

Click Finish.

- 279 -

Installing driver over the network
You need to download Linux software packages from the Dell website to install the printer
software (http://www.dell.com
find your product
Support or Downloads).

Install the Linux driver and add network printer
1

Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on. Also, your
machine’s IP address should have been set.

Download the Unified Linux Driver package from the Dell website.

Extract the Unified Linux Driver package and open the new directory.

Double-click the cdroot

The Dell installer window opens. Click Next.

The add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.

Select network printer and click Search button.

The machine’s IP address and model name appears on list field.

Select your machine and click Next.

autorun.

Input the printer description and Next.

After the machine is added, click Finish.

When installation is done, click Finish.

Add a network printer
1

Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator.

Click Add Printer.

The Add printer wizard window opens. Click Next.

Select Network printer and click the Search button.

The printer’s IP address and model name appears on list field.

Select your machine and click Next.

Enter the printer description and click Next.

After the machine is added, click Finish.

- 280 -

Using the Unified Driver Configurator
The Unified Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for configuring machine devices. You
need to install Unified Linux Driver to use Unified Driver Configurator, see "Installing the MFP

Driver".
After installing the MFP driver, the Unified Driver Configurator icon will automatically be
created on your desktop.

Opening Unified Driver Configurator
1

Double-click Unified Driver Configurator on the desktop.
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select DELL Unified Driver and then
DELL Unified Driver Configurator.

Click each button on the left to switch to the corresponding configuration window.

Printers Configuration button
Scanners Configuration button
MFP Ports Configuration button

You can use the onscreen help by clicking Help.
3

After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the Unified Driver Configurator.

- 281 -

Printers Configuration
Printers configuration has the two tabs; Printers and Classes.

Printers Tab
You can see the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the printer icon button
on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator window.

Switches to Printer
configuration.

Shows all of the
installed printer.

Shows the status, model
name and URI of your
printer.

You can use the following printer control buttons:
•

Refresh: Renews the available printers list.

•

Add Printer: Allows you to add a new printer.

•

Remove Printer: Removes the selected printer.

•

Set as Default: Sets the current printer as a default printer.

•

Stop/Start: Stops/starts the machine.

•

Test: Allows you to print a test page to check if the machine is working properly.

•

Properties: Allows you to view and change the printer properties. For details, see
"Printing a Document".

- 282 -

Classes Tab
The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes.

Shows all of the printer
classes.

Shows the status of the
class and the number of
printers in the class.

•

Refresh: Renews the classes list.

•

Add Class...: Allows you to add a new printer class.

•

Remove Class: Removes the selected printer class.

- 283 -

MFP Ports Configuration
In this window, you can view the list of available MFP ports, check the status of each port
and release a port that is stalled in busy state when its owner is terminated for any reason.

Switches to MPF ports
configuration.
Shows all of the
available ports.

Shows the port type,
device connected to the
port and status.

•

Refresh: Renews the available ports list.

•

Release port: Releases the selected port.

Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners
Your printer may be connected to a host computer via the parallel port or USB port. Since
the MFP device contains more than one device (printer and scanner), it is necessary to
organize proper access of “consumer” applications to these devices via the single I/O port.
The Dell MFP driver package provides an appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used
by Dell printer and scanner drivers. The drivers address their devices via so-called MFP ports.
The current status of any MFP port can be viewed via the MFP Ports Configuration. The port
sharing prevents you from accessing one functional block of the MFP device, while another
block is in use.
When you install a new MFP printer onto your system, it is strongly recommended you do
this with the assistance of an Unified Driver Configurator. In this case you will be asked to
choose I/O port for the new device. This choice will provide the most suitable configuration
for MFP’s functionality. For MFP scanners I/O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers
automatically, so proper settings are applied by default.

- 284 -

Printing a Document
Printing from Applications
There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to print from using Common UNIX
Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your machine from any such application.
1

Open the document to print.

Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Print Setup for some applications).

Choose your paper size, orientation, and make sure that your machine is selected.
Click Apply.

Open the File menu and click File.

Select your machine to print.

Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print.

Change other printing options in each tab, if necessary.

Click Print.

Printing Files
You can print text, image, pdf files on your machine using the standard CUPS directly from
the command line interface. The CUPS lp or lpr utility allows
you to do that. You can print these files by using below command format.
"lp -d -o

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 359
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:6ec451d0-7ebb-11ef-0000-35b5f9422220
Producer                        : GPL Ghostscript 9.07
Keywords                        : Printers and Imaging Solutions#Mono Laser Printers#dell b2375dfw#dell-b2375dfw#User's Guide#Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP User’s Guide
Modify Date                     : 2014:09:28 04:34:54+05:00
Create Date                     : 2014:09:28 04:34:54+05:00
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 8.0
Document ID                     : uuid:6ec451d0-7ebb-11ef-0000-35b5f9422220
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Dell B2375dfw Mono MFP User’s Guide
Creator                         : Dell Inc.
Description                     : User's Guide
Author                          : Dell Inc.
Subject                         : User's Guide

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Dell B2375dnf B2375dfw Mono MFP User’s Guide User Manual To The 6c8323fc 9d62 4e22 9c86 E2a297349b02

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation